Page 1 Service Manual iR C3200 Series iR C3220N PRT Dec 3 2004...
Page 3 When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
Page 4 Introduction Symbols Used This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire). Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Page 5 Introduction The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Contents Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1.1 System Construction ............................1-1 1.1.1 System Construction of the Pickup/Delivery Options ................1-1 1.1.2 System Configuration and Print/Transmission Accessories ..............1-2 1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories ..................1-3 1.1.4 Overview of Printing/Transmitting Accessories ..................1-4 1.2 Product Specifications ............................
Page 8 Contents 2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work ....................2-6 2.2 Unpacking and Installation ..........................2-7 2.2.1 Checking the Contents ..........................2-7 2.2.2 Configuring the Cassette ..........................2-7 2.2.3 Connecting the Reader Unit ........................2-8 2.2.4 Removing the Fixing Members from the Printer ..................2-9 2.2.5 Installing the Reader Unit .........................
Page 9 Contents Chapter 3 Basic Operation 3.1 Construction ..............................3-1 3.1.1 Functional Construction ..........................3-1 3.1.2 Arrangement of Major PCBs ........................3-2 3.2 Basic Sequence ..............................3-5 3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ....................3-5 3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations ........................3-7 Chapter 4 Basic Operations (As a Printer) 4.1 Construction ..............................
Page 10 Contents 5.7.1.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ....................5-25 5.7.1.5 Removing the HDD ........................... 5-26 5.7.1.6 Removing the Hard Disk Mounting Plates ..................5-26 5.7.1.7 Removing the Ethernet Board ......................5-26 5.7.1.8 Removing the UFR Board ......................... 5-27 5.7.1.9 Removing the SRAM PCB ........................ 5-27 5.7.1.10 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ..................
Page 11 Contents Chapter 6 Original Exposure System 6.1 Construction ..............................6-1 6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................. 6-1 6.1.2 Major Components ............................. 6-1 6.1.3 Construction of the Control System ......................6-4 6.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ..........................6-4 6.2 Basic Sequence ..............................6-5 6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ....................
Page 12 Contents 6.4.6.5 After Replacing the CCD Unit ......................6-24 6.4.7 Fuse PCB (option) ............................. 6-24 6.4.7.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ..................... 6-24 6.4.7.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ............. 6-24 6.4.7.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit (option; 100/230v model only) ............6-25 6.4.8 Scanner Motor ............................
Page 13 Contents 8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing ....................8-5 8.3.1.1 Turning On/Off the Laser ........................8-5 8.3.1.2 BD Signal ............................8-7 8.3.1.3 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction ..............8-8 8.3.1.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction ..............8-8 8.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ..................... 8-9 8.3.2.1 APC Control ............................
Page 14 Contents 9.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit .......................... 9-24 9.5.1.1 Outline of the Drum Unit ........................9-24 9.5.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) ................9-25 9.5.2 Developing Assembly ..........................9-26 9.5.2.1 Construction of the Developing Assembly ..................9-26 9.5.2.2 Controlling the Developing Bias .......................
Page 15 Contents 9.8.2.7 Opening the Main Controller Box ..................... 9-54 9.8.2.8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting .................... 9-55 9.8.2.9 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ..................9-56 9.8.2.10 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ................... 9-56 9.8.2.11 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ..................... 9-56 9.8.2.12 Removing the Lattice Controller Base ....................
Page 16 Contents 9.8.12 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ......................9-78 9.8.12.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit ................ 9-78 9.8.12.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ..................9-78 9.8.12.3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt ..................9-79 9.8.12.4 Removing the Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ................9-81 9.8.13 Toner Container Drive Unit ........................
Page 17 Contents 9.8.18.4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit ....................9-96 9.8.19 Auto Registration Sensor PCB ........................ 9-97 9.8.19.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit ................ 9-97 9.8.19.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ..................9-98 9.8.19.3 Removing the Upper Right Cover ....................9-98 9.8.19.4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit ....................
Page 18 Contents 10.9.1 Delivery ..............................10-32 10.9.2 Movement in the Direction of Face-Down Delivery ................10-33 10.9.3 Movement in the Direction of Face-Up Delivery ................. 10-34 10.9.4 Movement for CenterTray delivery ...................... 10-34 10.9.5 Moement for Copy Tray Dievyer ......................10-35 10.10 Parts Replacement Procedure ........................
Page 19 Contents 10.10.8.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor ..................10-47 10.10.8.8 Mounting the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate ..............10-47 10.10.9 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ..................... 10-48 10.10.9.1 Removing the Cassette ........................ 10-48 10.10.9.2 Removing the Front Right Cover ....................10-48 10.10.9.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover ....................
Page 20 Contents 10.10.19.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ....................10-66 10.10.19.2 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover ..................10-67 10.10.19.3 Removing the Manual Feed Roller .................... 10-67 10.10.19.4 Removing the Motor Cover ....................... 10-68 10.10.19.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ................10-69 10.10.20 Registration Motor ..........................
Page 21 Contents 10.10.29 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ................. 10-86 10.10.29.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover ....................10-86 10.10.29.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ..................10-86 10.10.29.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) ..............10-86 10.10.29.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) ..............10-87 10.10.29.5 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting Plate .........
Page 22 Contents 10.10.36.21 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB ..................10-105 10.10.36.22 Removing the Duplex Pickup Sensor ..................10-105 10.10.37 Duplex Registration Clutch ......................10-106 10.10.37.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ....................... 10-106 10.10.37.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit ................... 10-107 10.10.37.3 Removing the Duplex Feeder Motor Connector ..............10-107 10.10.37.4 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ................
Page 23 Contents 10.10.45.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) ..............10-137 10.10.45.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) ..............10-138 10.10.45.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Motor ................10-141 10.10.46 Face-Down Delivery Sensor 1 ......................10-141 10.10.46.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover ..................... 10-141 10.10.46.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ..................
Page 24 Contents 11.3 Various Control Mechanisms ........................11-7 11.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller ..................... 11-7 11.3.1.1 Outline ............................. 11-7 11.3.1.2 Controlling the Speed According to the Type of Paper ..............11-7 11.3.1.3 Controlling the Speed According to the Quantity of Printing ............11-8 11.3.1.4 Preventing Partial Deformation of the Roller ..................
Page 25 Contents 11.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch ......................... 11-37 11.5.7.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ......................11-37 11.5.7.2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide .................... 11-38 11.5.7.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ....................11-38 11.5.7.4 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch ..................11-40 11.5.7.5 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ..................... 11-41 11.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater ....................
Page 26 Contents 11.5.15.9 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover ..................11-67 11.5.15.10 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ............. 11-67 11.5.15.11 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit ....................11-68 11.5.15.12 Removing the Fixing Motor ...................... 11-69 Chapter 12 Externals and Controls 12.1 Control Panel ..............................12-1 12.1.1 Outline ..............................
Page 27 Contents 12.5.2.8 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ..................12-21 12.5.2.9 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ................. 12-21 12.5.2.10 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ..................12-21 12.5.3 High-Voltage Unit ..........................12-22 12.5.3.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................12-22 12.5.3.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ....................
Page 28 Contents 12.5.12.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................12-32 12.5.12.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ....................12-32 12.5.12.3 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting ................12-32 12.5.12.4 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB ....................12-33 12.5.13 Relay PCB 1 ............................12-33 12.5.13.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................12-33 12.5.13.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ....................
Page 29 Contents 12.5.20 Main Power Switch ..........................12-44 12.5.20.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................12-44 12.5.20.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ....................12-44 12.5.20.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ..................12-44 12.5.20.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................... 12-44 12.5.20.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ...................
Page 30 Contents 12.5.25.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ..................12-58 12.5.25.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................... 12-58 12.5.25.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ..................12-58 12.5.25.6 Opening the Main Controller Box ....................12-59 12.5.25.7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ................... 12-60 12.5.26 Power Supply Cooing Fan ........................
Page 31 Contents 14.1.3 Printer Unit ............................. 14-1 14.2 Durables and Consumables ........................... 14-2 14.2.1 Outline ..............................14-2 14.2.2 Reader Unit/Color Image Reader-C1 ..................... 14-2 14.2.3 Printer Unit ............................. 14-2 14.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ......................14-4 14.3.1 Scheduled Servicing (Reader Unit) ......................14-4 14.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (Printer Unit) ......................
Page 32 Contents 16.2.2 Test Print TYPE ............................16-4 16.2.3 Selecting a Test Print TYPE ........................16-4 16.2.4 Gradations (TYPE=4) ..........................16-5 16.2.5 Full Halftone (TYPE=5) ......................... 16-5 16.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) ............................16-6 16.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripe (TYPE=10) ....................16-7 16.2.8 Gradations (TYPE=12) ........................... 16-8 16.2.9 Full Color 16 Gradations (TYPE=14) ....................
Page 33 Contents 16.3.8.3 0105 Jam Code: Occurs with machine having mylar sheet to fixing/feeder sensor flag .... 16-117 16.3.8.4 JAM CODE 0107 ........................16-117 16.3.8.5 JAM CODE 0108, 0207 ......................16-118 16.3.8.6 JAM CODE 0207 ........................16-118 16.3.8.7 0207 Jam Code: Because of deformation of internal delivery roller ........... 16-118 16.3.8.8 0A06 Jam Code ...........................
Page 34 Contents 16.3.10.34 E110-0x10 Error Code ......................16-138 16.3.10.35 E202 Error code detail A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position. .. 16-139 16.3.10.36 E202-0000 Error Code ......................16-139 16.3.10.37 E220 Error code detail A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp....... 16-140 16.3.10.38 E220-0000 Error Code: Entire image sometimes becomes tinged with red ......
Page 35 Contents 16.3.10.84 E602-0001/E602-0002/E602-0003 Error Code: Remedy upon occurrence of error code ..16-162 16.3.10.85 E602 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty............... 16-163 16.3.10.86 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a failure of the Distribution Board PCB Ass'y ..................
Page 36 Contents 16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code ......................16-180 16.3.10.126 E747-00FF Error Code ......................16-180 16.3.10.127 E751-0304 Error Code ......................16-181 16.3.10.128 E804 Error code detail The power supply cooling fan is faulty........... 16-181 16.3.10.129 E804-0004 Error Code ......................16-181 16.3.10.130 E804-0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan (FM7) which is fixed on the controller box .....................
Page 37 Contents Chapter 18 Service Mode 18.1 Outline ................................18-1 18.1.1 Service mode screen configuration ......................18-1 18.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ....................... 18-2 18.1.3 Exiting service modes ..........................18-3 18.1.4 Service mode backup ..........................18-3 18.1.5 Initial screen ............................18-4 18.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen .......................
Page 38 Contents 18.5.1.5 CLEANING ........................... 18-84 18.5.1.6 FIXING ............................18-84 18.5.1.7 PANEL ............................18-85 18.5.1.8 PART-CHK ........................... 18-85 18.5.1.9 CLEAR ............................18-86 18.5.1.10 MISC-R ............................18-86 18.5.1.11 MISC-P ............................18-86 18.5.1.12 SYSTEM ............................18-87 18.5.2 FEEDER ..............................18-88 18.5.2.1 SENS-INT ............................18-88 18.5.3 FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode): Level 2 ................
Page 39 Contents 19.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure ........................ 19-28 19.4.2 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module ..................19-35 19.4.2.1 Outline ............................19-35 19.4.2.2 Downloading Procedure ........................ 19-36 19.4.3 Downloading the BOOT Software ......................19-42 19.4.3.1 Outline ............................19-42 19.4.3.2 Downloading Procedure ........................ 19-44 19.4.4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software ..................
Page 40 Contents...
Page 41: Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 1 Introduction...
Page 43: Construction
Contents Contents 1.1 System Construction ............................1-1 1.1.1 System Construction of the Pickup/Delivery Options ................1-1 1.1.2 System Configuration and Print/Transmission Accessories ..............1-2 1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories ..................1-3 1.1.4 Overview of Printing/Transmitting Accessories ..................1-4 1.2 Product Specifications ............................1-5 1.2.1 Names of Parts ............................
Page 45: System Construction
Chapter 1 1.1 System Construction 1.1.1 System Construction of the Pickup/Delivery Options 0000-4246 A system may be configured as follows: [14] [17] [10] [11] [15] [16] *[5] [12] [15] [13] [16] F-1-1 T-1-1 [1] Finisher-M1 [10] Slide Paper Deck-P1 [2] Saddle Finisher-N2 [11] Card Reader-D1 [3] Finisher-N1 [12] Plain Pedestal-C1...
Page 46: System Configuration And Print/Transmission Accessories
Chapter 1 1.1.2 System Configuration and Print/Transmission Accessories 0006-8287 The machine may be configured as follows: [12] [8A] [8B] [10] [7A] [7B] [11] F-1-2 [1] Super G3 Fax Board-M2 [2] Ethernet Board (standard) [3] UFR Board or Open Interface Board [4] USB Interface Board or TokeRing Board [5] Image Conversion Board-A2 [6] PS Print Server Unit-C1...
Page 47: Functions Of Printing/Transmission Accessories
Chapter 1 1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories 0006-8352 T-1-2 GDI-UFR printing -> - UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2 LIPS printing -> - UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2 - PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS)-A2 LIPS/PS kanji printing -> - UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2 - PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS/PS kanji)-A2 Transmitting ->...
Page 48: Overview Of Printing/Transmitting Accessories
Chapter 1 1.1.4 Overview of Printing/Transmitting Accessories 0006-8332 The following gives an outline of individual accessories; for details, see the descriptions found in subsequent chapters: 1) UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2 Adds GDI-UFR printing functions and scanning functions associated with ScanGear. 2) PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS)-A2 Adds LIPS printing functions.
Page 49: Product Specifications
Chapter 1 1.2 Product Specifications 1.2.1 Names of Parts 1.2.1.1 External View 0000-4257 F-1-3 T-1-3 [1] Rear left cover [10] Delivery cover (2) [2] Copyboard cover [11] Lower left cover [3] Reader front cover [12] Rear left cover (lower) [4] Upper left cover (small) [13] Delivery cover (1) [5] Center delivery tray [14] Rear left cover (upper)
Page 50 Chapter 1 F-1-4 T-1-4 [1] Reader right cover [8] Right cover [2] Copyboard glass [9] Front right cover [3] Reader rear cover [10] Manual feed tray [4] Upper right cover (small) [11] Manual feed unit cover [5] Upper rear cover [12] Model right cover [6] Lower rear cover [13] Upper right cover...
Page 51: Cross Section
Chapter 1 1.2.1.2 Cross Section 0000-4258 [1] [2] [3] [4] [46] [45] [44] [43] [42] [41] [40] [39] [10] [38] [11] [37] [12] [13] [14] [36] [15] [16] [35] [17] [18] [34] [19] [33] [20] [32] [31] [30] [29] [28] [27] [26] [25]...
Page 52: Using The Machine
Chapter 1 [11] Manual feed roller [34] Duplex roller 1 [12] Pre-registration roller [35] Internal delivery roller [13] Manual feed separation roller [36] Face-up delivery roller [14] Re-pick up roller [37] Delivery vertical path roll [15] Pickup vertical path roller [38] Delivery vertical path roller 2 [16] Feed roller [39] Photopositive drum...
Page 53: Points To Note When Turning Off The Main Power Switch
Chapter 1 T-1-6 [1] Control panel power switch [3] Main power switch [2] Main power lamp Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated. (The machine is accessing its HDD.) Otherwise, the HDD can go out of order (E602). Starting up.
Page 54 Chapter 1 Execution/Memory Error F-1-8 - When Downloading Is Under Way Never turn off the main power switch or the control panel power switch. (If you turn off the main power switch while downloading is under way, the machine may fail to operate.) F-1-9 1-10...
Page 55: Control Panel
Chapter 1 1.2.2.3 Control Panel 0000-4261 F-1-10 T-1-7 [1] Image contrast adjusting dial [10] User mode key [2] Counter check key [11] Numeric keypad [3] Power Save Key [12] Execute/Memory lamp [4] Control panel power switch [13] Error lamp [5] Touch pen holder [14] ID key [6] Clip holder [15] Clear key...
Page 56: User Mode Items
Chapter 1 1.2.3 User Mode Items 1.2.3.1 Common Settings 0006-0742 *Factory default. T-1-8 Mode Description initial functions *copy, fax, box, SEND use it to switch the System Status screen to the Initial screen. (*ON/OFF) use it to give priority to [device] of the System Status screen for display.
Page 57: Timer Settings
Chapter 1 Mode Description standard mode for local print paper select (*auto), print count (*1), sorter (*sort/group/stable), double-sided print (*off/on), file delete after print (*off/on), print merge (*off/on) switch language of display ON/*OFF reverse screen color ON/*OFF between-jobs shift *ON/OFF JPEG compression rate at remote scan high, *average, low gamma value at remote scan...
Page 58: Report Generation
Chapter 1 Mode Description auto gradation correction plain paper (full correction/quick correction), heavy paper (full correction/ quick correction) density correction copy/box, black-and-white transmission, color transmission; density 5 settings each cleaning inside machine cleaning of feeder 1.2.3.4 Report Generation 0000-4265 *factory settings. T-1-11 Mode Description...
Page 59: System Control Settings
Chapter 1 1.2.3.5 System Control Settings 0000-4266 *factory settings. T-1-12 Mode Description set system administrator info group ID control register ID, control count; ON/OFF set communication control fax settings, system box settings enable/disable remote UI *ON/OFF limit destinations list ID in destinations table, access No.
Page 60: Copier Specifications Settings
Chapter 1 1.2.3.6 Copier Specifications Settings 0000-4267 *factory settings. T-1-13 Mode Description set preference key 1/2 w/ function, *no settings auto sort *ON/OFF priority on image orientation ON/*OFF indicate copy wait time ON/*OFF enable auto vertical/horizontal *ON/OFF rotation change standard mode register/initialize initialize copier ecifications settings Yes, No...
Page 61: Box Specifications Settings
Chapter 1 Mode Description sound of transmission (*add/do not add)>location of indication (inside of image/outside of image), telephone number mark (*fax/tel), communication mode (G3-G4/ *G3 only) initialize transmission function settings common setup>reproduction record double-sided (ON/*OFF) function setup cassette selection>switch A, B, C, D image resolution>image resolution (*on/off), reduction mode (*auto/fixed), fixing mode reduction rate (97%/95%/ 90%/75%), reduction direction (vertical and horizontal/...
Page 62: Printer Specifications Settings
Chapter 1 1.2.3.9 Printer Specifications Settings 0000-4270 Making settings if the machine is not equipped with any accessory. * factory settings. T-1-16 Mode Description set specifications number of copies (1 to 2000: *1) double-sided (double-sided, *single sided) pickup>default paper size, default paper type, paper size replacement (*yes/no) print adjustment>super smooth (*yes/no), toner density (YMCK density 8 settings), toner saving (yes/*no)
Page 63: Destinations Table Specifications Settings
Chapter 1 1.2.3.10 Destinations Table Specifications Settings 0000-4271 T-1-17 Mode Description register destination register name of destination register one-touch button 1.2.4 User Maintenance 1.2.4.1 Cleaning 0000-4272 - Face of Copyboard, Back of Copyboard Cover Instruct the user to clean the face of the copyboard glass and the back of the copyboard cover at least once a month. Cleaning Procedure Using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent (well-wrung), clean the face of the copyboard glass [1] and the back of the copyboard cover [2];...
Page 64: Inspection
Chapter 1 1.2.4.2 Inspection 0000-4273 - Checking the Leakage Breaker Instruct the user to check the leakage breaker periodically (once or twice a month), and keep a record of the work. Inspection Procedure 1) Turn on the main power switch. 2) Press the test button [1] of the breaker with the tip of a ball-point pen [2] or the like.
Page 65: Regulations By The Center For Devices And Radiational Heath(Cdrh)
Chapter 1 constructed to prevent leakage of laser light outside it. As such, the light cannot escape the machine as long as the machine is used for the operations for which it is designed. 1.2.5.2 Regulations by the Center for Devices and Radiational Heath(CDRH) 0000-4275 The Center for Devices and Radiation Heath (CDRH) of the United States put into effect regulations drawn up for laser products.
Page 66: Product Specifications
Chapter 1 Toner Stains 1. If your skin or clothing has come into contact with toner, remove it with dry tissue, and then wash with water. 2. Do not use warm water; otherwise, the toner will become jell-like, permanently fusing with the fibers of the cloth and resisting removal.
Page 67: Function List
Chapter 1 1.2.7 Function List 1.2.7.1 Print Speed 0006-3356 First Print Time T-1-18 Unit: sec Full-color Monochrome A4, plain (64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2) 12.8 (simplex model) 9.5 (simplex model) 13.1 (duplex model) 9.8 (duplex model) Printing Speed - Plain Paper Mode (64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2) T-1-19 unit: prints/min Paper size...
Page 68 Chapter 1 - Thick Paper Mode (more than 105 g/m2) T-1-20 unit: prints/min Paper size Cassette, Manual feeder, Side paper deck, Face-down, Face-up, single-sided single-sided single-sided double-sided double-sided 6.75 5.13 6.75 5.13 6.75 5.13 STMT-R 6.75 5.13 6.75 5.13 3.75 LTR-R 3.75 3.75...
Page 69: Print Size
Chapter 1 - Monochrome, transparency T-1-22 unit: prints/min Paper size Cassette, single-sided Manual feeder, single-sided LTR-R 1.2.7.2 Print Size 0006-3390 T-1-23 Manual Feed Side Paper Cassette Duplexing Cassette Tray Deck Pedestal Unit*2 <Paper Size> 279x432[mm] (11x17) 305x457[mm] (12x18) 320x450[mm] (12.6x17.7) LTR-R STMT-R postcard...
Page 70 Chapter 1 T-1-24 Manual Side Paper Cassette Duplexing Cassette Feed Tray Deck Pedestal Unit*2 <Paper Type> light paper (up to 64 g/m2) plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) heavy paper (up to 209 g/2) recycled paper transparency*1 (A4/LTR) bond paper *1 gloss paper*1 label paper*1 Japanese...
Page 71: Others
Chapter 1 1.2.7.3 Others 0006-3415 T-1-25 Operation Temperature range 15 to 32.5 deg C environment Humidity range 25 to 75% Atmospheric pressure range 810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm) Operating noise In operation 74 dB or less In standby 50 dB or less Power supply 100 V...
Page 72: Reader Unit Specifications
Chapter 1 1.2.7.4 Reader Unit Specifications 0006-3419 T-1-26 Copyboard Fixed Original size detection Feed sensors, reading CCD; copyboard cover angle Original type Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.) Maximum original size 297 mm x 432 mm Reproduction ratio 100%, Reduce I (1:0.250), Reduce II (1:0.500), Reduce III (1:0.611), Reduce IV (1:0.707), Reduce V (1:0.816), Reduce VI (1:0.865);...
Page 73: Chapter 2 Installation
Chapter 2 Installation...
Page 75 Contents Contents 2.1 Making Pre-Checks ............................2-1 2.1.1 Selecting the Site ............................2-1 2.1.2 Site Space ..............................2-3 2.1.3 Sequence of Installing Accessories ......................2-5 2.1.4 Connecting the Power Cables ........................2-6 2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work ....................2-6 2.2 Unpacking and Installation ..........................
Page 76 Contents 2.12 Installing the Cassette Heater ........................2-59 2.12.1 Checking the Contents ..........................2-59 2.12.2 Installation Procedure ..........................2-60 2.12.3 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a Copier ..................2-61 2.12.4 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1 .............. 2-63 2.13 Replacing the Drum Unit ..........................
Page 77: Making Pre-Checks
Chapter 2 2.1 Making Pre-Checks 2.1.1 Selecting the Site 0000-4363 Select the site of installation while keeping the following in mind; if possible, visit the user's premises before the delivery of the machine: 1. The place must provide a source of power that is as rated (±10%) and that may be used exclusively by the machine; it also must provide a terminal for grounding.
Page 78 Chapter 2 100 mm min. 1110 mm 500 mm min. 500 mm 1225 mm 500 mm min. min. F-2-2 Without Options 100 mm min. 1120 mm 500 mm min. 500 mm 2000 mm 500 mm min. min. F-2-3...
Page 79: Site Space
Chapter 2 With a Finisher-N1 and Side Paper Deck-P1 Installed 100 mm min. 1120 mm 500 mm min. 500 mm 2210 mm 500 mm min. min. F-2-4 With a Finisher-N1/Saddle Finisher-N2 and Side Paper Deck-P1 Installed 7. The site must be well ventilated. Take care so that the machine will not be installed near a vent from which air is taken into the room.
Page 80 Chapter 2 With Accessories Installed 100 mm min. 1120 mm 500 mm min. 500 mm 2000 mm 500 mm min. min. F-2-6 With a Finisher-M1, Side Paper Deck-P1, and NEW Controller-A1 Installed 100 mm min. 1120 mm 500 mm min. 500 mm 2210 mm 500 mm...
Page 81: Sequence Of Installing Accessories
Chapter 2 F-2-7 With a Finisher-N1/Saddle Finisher-N2, Side Paper Deck-P1, and NE Controller-A1 Installed 200 mm min. 1110mm 500 mm min. 500 mm 1225 mm 500 mm min. F-2-8 With a PS Print Server Unit-C1 Installed 2) Be sure the room is well ventilated. Be sure also that the machine is not placed near the air vent of the room. 2.1.3 Sequence of Installing Accessories 0006-4594 Memo,...
Page 82: Connecting The Power Cables
Chapter 2 2.1.4 Connecting the Power Cables 0006-4602 When connecting accessories to the machine, be sure to connect the power cables as indicated: When connecting the pedestal, paper deck, finisher, ADF, anti-condensation heater, and PS print server unit. DADF-K1 Inlet included with anti-condensation heater) PS Print Server Unit-C1...
Page 83: Checking The
Chapter 2 Unpacking Installation 2.2.1 Checking Contents 0006-4619 Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the following is missing: F-2-10 T-2-1 Drum unit (Y, M, C, K) 1 pc. 1 pc. [10] Cable clamp (round) 6 pc.
Page 84: Reader Unit
Chapter 2 4) Push the release button of the cassette, and slide out the cassette to the front. 5) Find out the size of paper used by the user, and set the slide guide [1] of each cassette to suit the paper size.
Page 85: Removing The Fixing Members From The Printer
Chapter 2 2.2.4 Removing the Fixing Members from the Printer 0006-4646 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] from the left side of the machine. F-2-16 3) Using 5 included round cable clamps [1], fix the reader unit power cable [2] in place; then, using another round cable clamp [1] and 2 angular cable clamps, fix the reader controller communication cable [4] in place.
Page 86: Installing The Reader Unit
Chapter 2 F-2-23 F-2-21 2) Remove the face cap [1]. (Save it for later.) 3) Shift the fixing roller releasing lever [1] back to its initial position, and push in the fixing/feeding assembly. F-2-24 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the inside cover F-2-22 [2].
Page 87 Chapter 2 Fit it so that the sheet [1] attached to the joint plate is under the joint [2]. F-2-26 5) Remove the face cap [1], and remove the screw [2] (1 each); then, detach the 2 small covers [3]. (Put away the cap;...
Page 88 Chapter 2 8) For both front and rear, secure the joint grounding 10) Secure the reader connection unit [1] using the 2 spring [2] using the screw [1] removed from the included screws [2]. small cover (for the front, tighten over the plate); then, secure the joint plate (front/rear) [4] using the 2 included screws [3] (1 each at front and rear).
Page 89 Chapter 2 F-2-38 F-2-41 15) Unpack the reader unit. 16) Place the reader unit on the printer unit 7 to 8 cm displaced to the side (temporarily). When folding the arm, be sure that it is under the protrusion. 7 to 8cm F-2-42 F-2-39 17) Fit the included supports into the 2 holes in the...
Page 90 Chapter 2 20) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper left cover [2]. (Save all for later.) F-2-44 18) Open the delivery cover [1]. F-2-47 21) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader left cover [2]. (Save all for later.) F-2-45 19) Remove the face cap [1], and remove the 2 screws [2];...
Page 91 Chapter 2 25) Attach the reader left cover using the 2 previously removed screws. F-2-50 F-2-53 23) Bend and remove the 2 claws [1] found on the top of the removed upper left cover; then, attach them 26) Remove the 2 mirror fixing screws [1] from the in place using the 2 previously removed screws.
Page 92: Installing The Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Unit
Chapter 2 28) When the positioning pin [1] is fully in place, 2.2.6 Installing secure it using the stepped screw [2]. Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Unit 0006-4664 Do not touch the roller area of the secondary transfer outside roller. 1) Open the package, and open the cardboard used to protect the secondary transfer outside roller unit.
Page 93: Connecting The Power Cord
Chapter 2 2.2.7 Connecting the Power 2.2.8 Mounting Cord Transfer Cleaning Unit 0006-4669 0000-4367 - When Using a Pedestal 1) Open the front cover. 1) Fix the power cord that comes with the machine in 2) Turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever place to the pedestal side using the included cable [1] in the direction of the arrow.
Page 94: Fitting The Toner Container
Chapter 2 2.2.9 Fitting the Toner Container 0000-4368 Each toner container has its specific position according to color (viewing from the control panel and starting at the left, Y, M, C, and Bk). Do not force the wrong container into place. F-2-65 1) Take out the toner container (Y) from the packing box.
Page 95: Fitting The Drum Unit
Chapter 2 5) Push it all the way in the direction of the arrow indicated on the top edge. F-2-71 F-2-69 4) Remove the anti-interference sheet [1]. 6) Shift the fixing lever of the toner container (Y) back to its initial position (by turning it counterclockwise by 90°).
Page 96 Chapter 2 6) Turn the open/close lever [2] of the cartridge cover [1] clockwise by 90° to open the cartridge cover. F-2-76 F-2-74 7) Match the groove [1] found behind the machine's cartridge cover and the protrusion [2] found on the bottom of the protective cover;...
Page 97: Connecting To The Network
Chapter 2 2.2.11 Connecting to the Network 0000-4371 Perform the following only if the model is equipped with printer functions. 1) Turn off the control panel power switch. 2) Turn off the main power switch. 3) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power switch.
Page 98: Checking The Connection To The Network
Chapter 2 2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network 2.3.1 Checking the Connection to the Network 0000-8240 Perform the following work only if the machine is equipped with printer functions: If the user's network is in a TCP/IP environment, use the PING function to make sure that the Ethernet PCB has been installed properly and all network settings have been made properly.
Page 99: Making Checks Using A Remote Host Address
Chapter 2 2.3.3 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address 0000-4374 You can execute PING using a remote host address, thereby checking the connection to the network. The term "remote address" refers to the IP address of a PC terminal connected to and operating in a TCP/IP network environment to which the machine belongs.
Page 100: Troubleshooting The Network
Chapter 2 2.4 Troubleshooting the Network 2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network 0000-4375 Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to the network: If the connection to the network is not correct, you may suspect the following: a. poor connection between the network and the Ethernet PCB b.
Page 101: Checking The Images/Operations
Chapter 2 2.5 Checking the Images/Operations 2.5.1 Checking the Images/Operations 0000-4379 Be sure to put back the service book cover; turning on the machine's main power without doing so will cause a fault associated with error code E020. (The protrusion [A] of the service book cover will push the segment identified as [B] in the figure when the front cover is closed, thus opening/closing the shutter assembly of the pattern reader unit.) F-2-79 Place a test sheet on the copyboard glass, and select the cassette 1/2 as the source of paper;...
Page 102 Chapter 2 F-2-80 - Making Adjustments for Cassette 1 Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the right front stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the position of the adjusting plate [2]. (Do the same for cassette 3/4.) F-2-81 If the adjusting plate is moved to the right,...
Page 103 Chapter 2 F-2-83 4) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the right front stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the position of the adjusting plate [2]. F-2-84 If the adjusting plate is moved to the right, image the margin to the front of the paper will decrease.
Page 104: Pascal Setting
Chapter 2 2) Change the setting to make adjustments. (A change by '1' will cause a shift of 0.1 mm; a higher value will move the image toward the leading edge of the paper.) Image An increase in the value of REGIST will move the image toward the leading edge of the paper.
Page 105: Preventing Anti-Condensation
Chapter 2 2.5.3 Preventing Anti-Condensation 0006-4719 If condensation is expected at the site of installation, enable or disable the sleep mechanism on a monthly basis to prevent it. Service Mode (Category 2) COPIER>OPTIONAL>BODY>SLPOFF01 to 12 Setting 0: enable sleep mode 1: disable sleep mode (prevent condensation) 2-29...
Page 106: Relocating The Machine
Chapter 2 2.6 Relocating the Machine 2.6.1 Preparing for Relocation 0000-4381 If the machine must be relocated after installation, be sure to perform the following work before relocation: Do not use the machine's grips when moving it over a step while it is on a pedestal; otherwise, the machine and the pedestal may separate.
Page 107: Installing The Card Reader
Chapter 2 2.7 Installing the Card Reader 2.7.1 Checking the Contents 0000-8498 Open the shipping box, and check to make sure none of the following is missing. F-2-89 [1] Card Reader-D1....1 unit [2] Pan-head screw (small)..1 pc. [3] Binding screw (M4)..... 4 pc. 2.7.2 Installation Procedure 0000-8502 1) Remove the face cap [1] and 2 screw [2];...
Page 108 Chapter 2 F-2-91 F-2-92 When attaching, be sure that a card may be inserted with the label on the face side. Using the 4 included binding screws [1], mount the card reader [2] to the inside cover. F-2-93 2-32...
Page 109: Making Settings If Net Spot Accountant (Nsa) Is Used
Chapter 2 4) Secure the grounding wire [1] in place using the included pan-head screw (small) [2]; then, connect the connector [3] of the card reader to the machine's connector. F-2-94 5) Attach the upper left cover (small) using the previously removed screw. 6) Turn on the main power switch, and make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD.
Page 110: Installing The Ne Controller-A1
Chapter 2 2.8 Installing the NE Controller-A1 2.8.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1 0000-8506 Keep the following in mind when installing the controller to its host machine: 1. Be sure that the work complies with the laws and regulations of the country of installation. 2.
Page 111 Chapter 2 F-2-97 4) Connect the cable [7] to the connector (J1511) [8] of the host machine's power distribution PCB. F-2-98 5) Secure the controller to the host machine's rear cover using the 4 included screws. F-2-99 2-35...
Page 112 Chapter 2 6) Remove the slack from the cable connecting to the host machine; as necessary, bundle any stray segment of the cables as shown and secure it in place with a harness band [9]. F-2-100 7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch (SW2) [10] on the PCB to ON (so that the mode used to communicate with the host machine will be IPC).
Page 113 Chapter 2 [12] LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 [11] F-2-102 9) Set the bits of the DIP switch (SW3) [13] as indicated. [13] LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-103 T-2-2 Notation Setting Description SW3-1 SW3-2 Description SW3-1 sets the signal transmission level of the SW3-2...
Page 114 Chapter 2 Notation Setting Description SW3-3 sets it to OFF at all times. SW3-4 sets the line setting to tone pulse. sets the line setting to dial pulse. SW3-5 sets the dial pulse speed to 20 pps. sets the dial pulse speed to 10 pps. SW3-6 not used 10) Connect the power plug of the power supply unit, and check to make sure that LED1 [14] (orange) on the PCB...
Page 115 Chapter 2 T-2-3 SW2 bits Setting SW2-1 SW2-2 SW2-3 SW2-4 SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 See step 8). SW2-8 12) When LED5 [17] (red) has gone ON, set the bits of the DIP switch (SW2) [15] on the PCB as indicated in the table, and press the push switch (SW4) [16] so that LED5 [17] (red) goes OFF, indicating the end of RAM initialization.
Page 116 Chapter 2 SW2 bits Setting SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 See step 8). SW2-8 13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch (SW2) [18] on the PCB to OFF. [18] LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-107 14) Connect the telephone line to the controller. If the connection is to the controller alone, connect the modular jack cable to the connector (LINE) [19].
Page 117 Chapter 2 15) Ring the service station for initial settings of the controller. (Upon arrival, LED 4 [21] (red) will start to flash.) LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 [21] F-2-109 16) Ring the service station, and find out if initial settings have been made. If the setup has failed, initialize the RAM once again (steps 11) through 13)) to start over.
Page 118 Chapter 2 19) Press the host machine's Start key, and check that LED3 [25] (pink) flashes each time paper is delivered. [25] LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-112 20) Attach the switch settings label [26] on the top cover, and record the switch settings. 21) Secure the upper cover [1] using 2 screws [2].
Page 119: Installing The Original Tray
Chapter 2 2.9 Installing the Original Tray 2.9.1 Checking the Contents 0000-8545 Open the shiping box, and check to make sure that none of the fllowing is missing: F-2-114 [1] Original base..1 pc. [2] Stepped screw (M4)... 2 pc. [3] Washer....
Page 120 Chapter 2 2) Separate the original tray into top and lower parts, and hook the cut-off [2] of the reinforcing plate of the original tray (upper) [1] on the stepped screw [3] previously fitted. F-2-116 3) Fit it to the original tray (lower) [1] together with the original tray (upper). F-2-117 2-44...
Page 121: Installing The Key Switch Unit-A1
Chapter 2 2.10 Installing the Key Switch Unit-A1 2.10.1 Checking the Contents 0000-8548 Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the following is missing: F-2-118 [1] Key switch unit ....1 pc. [2] Control key ....1 pc. [3] Binding screw (M4)....
Page 122 Chapter 2 2) Cut out the excess [1] of the upper right cover. F-2-120 3) Slide out the manual feed tray; then, remove tha screw [1], and detach the middle right cover. F-2-121 4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right cover [2]. F-2-122 2-46...
Page 123: Making Checks After Installation
Chapter 2 5) Fit the plate of the key switch unit [1] into the cut-off of the upper right stay; then, secure it in place using the included binding screw [2]. F-2-123 6) Connect the connector [1]. F-2-124 7) Attach the upper right cover using the 2 previously removed screws. 8) Attach the printer upper right cover using the 2 right screws.
Page 124: Installing The Reader Heater
Chapter 2 2.11 Installing the Reader Heater 2.11.1 Checking the Contents 0000-8554 Be sure to turn off the host machine before starting the work and observe the points to note indicated on the next page. Open the shipping box, and check none of the following is missing: F-2-125 T-2-5 Reader heater...
Page 125: Installation Procedure
Chapter 2 2.11.2 Installation Procedure 0000-8557 Before starting the work, be sure to perform the follwing: 1. Turn off the control panel power switch. 2. Turn off the main power switch. 3. Disconnect the power cable (for wall outlet). [1] OFF [2] OFF [3] Pull out.
Page 126 Chapter 2 3) Desconnect the reader controller communication cable. 4) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the reader unit rear cover [2]. (Save it for later.) F-2-128 5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the face plate. (Save it for later.) F-2-129 6) Using the 2 included screws [1], mount the fuse PCB unit [2].
Page 127 Chapter 2 7) Connect the harness [1] of the fuse PCB unit to the connector [2] of the interface PCB. F-2-131 When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass face and the white plate found on the back of it.
Page 128 Chapter 2 F-2-133 Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3]. F-2-134 When moving the No.1 mirror base, be sure to hold it by the bend [A] of the cut-out in the mirror stay shown in the figure.
Page 129 Chapter 2 F-2-136 Move the No.1 mirror base [1] fully to the right. F-2-137 When shifting the mirror unit, be sure not to touch the mirror unit. Otherwise, clean it with lint-free papaer moistened with aocohol. 2-53...
Page 130 Chapter 2 10) Mount the Reader heater where indicated in the figure. When doing so, be sure that the harness guide of the heater is above the harness of the fuse PCB. [2] [1] F-2-138 11) Using 2 included screws [1], secure the longer segment (silver-coloured) of the Reader heater [2]. F-2-139 12) Holding it where indicated [A], shift the No.1 mirror base to the left.
Page 131 Chapter 2 13) Fit the harness guide [1], i.e., fit it in the hole in the base plate, and shift it to the right to secure; then, fit the harness band [2]. F-2-141 14) Secure the shorter segment (black) of the Reader heater [1] using 2 included screws [2]. (To do so, insert a screwdriver through the hole in the lens cover.) F-2-142 15) Connect the connector [1] of the Reader heater to the connector [2] of the fuse PCB unit.
Page 132 Chapter 2 16) Put the No.1 mirror base to its initial position (left edge). 17) Attach the reader unit rear cover. When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to touch the glass face or the white plate found on its back. (Dirt can cause black lines in the images.) If soiled, clean it with lint-freee paper moistened with alcohol.
Page 133 Chapter 2 19) Secure the reader controller communication cable and the reader power supply cable back to their initial positions. 20) Connect the power cable. - If a pedestal (2-cassette pedestal or plain pedestal) is connected to the host machine, remove the 2 face stickers [1] from the upper rear cover.
Page 134 Chapter 2 - If no pedestal (2-cassette pedestal or plain pedestal) is connected to the host machine, connect the power cable (for wall outlet) [1] to the inlet terminal. F-2-148 - Only if 100v Model 21) Remove the screw [1] found under the inlet terminal, and connect the included gounding wire [1] (i.e., if no pedestal is connected).
Page 135: Checking The Contents
Chapter 2 2.12 Installing the Cassette Heater 2.12.1 Checking the Contents 0006-0711 To install the heater kit, you must obtain a separately available Cassette Heater Unit-24. Before starting the work, be sure to turn off the host machine; for installation, keep in mind the points to note indicated on the next page.
Page 136: Installation Procedure
Chapter 2 2.12.2 Installation Procedure 0006-0718 Before staritng the work, be sure to perform the following on the host machine in the order indicated: 1. Turn off the control panel power switch. 2. Turn off the main power switch. 3. Disconnect the power cable (for power outlet). [1] OFF [2] OFF [3] Pull out.
Page 137: Installing The Cassette Heater Kit To A Copier
Chapter 2 2.12.3 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a Copier 0006-0719 1) Pull out both cases of the copier. 2) Insert a screwdriver from the front of the copier, and remove the 2 screws [2] to detach the heater PCB unit cover [1] attached to the rear side plate of the copier.
Page 138 Chapter 2 F-2-156 5) Connect the included connector of the heater unit with the connector [2] of the heater PCB unit. F-2-157 When mounting the heater unit, be sure to securely fit the 3 protrusions, and check to make sure there is no gap. Fit the 3 protrusions [2] of the heater unit [1] into the slits in the base plate;...
Page 139: Installing The Cassette Heater Kit To A 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1
Chapter 2 F-2-158 F-2-159 7) Mount the heater PCB unit cover using the previously removed screw. 2.12.4 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1 0006-0720 1) Slide out both cassettes from the cassette pedestal. Hereafter, go through the same steps used for the installation to a copier. 2-63...
Page 140: Replacing The Drum Unit
Chapter 2 2.13 Replacing the Drum Unit 2.13.1 Preparing for the Work 0006-0723 1) Take out the drum unit (Y) from its shipping box; then, take out the drum unit (Y) [1] from its packing bag, and also take out the drying agent [2]. F-2-160 Do not remove the protective cover.
Page 141: Installation Procedure
Chapter 2 3) Remove the interference protective sheet [1]. F-2-162 2.13.2 Installation Procedure 0006-0728 Before starting the work, be sure to perform the following on the host machine in the order indicated: 1. Turn of the control panel power switch. 2.
Page 142 Chapter 2 1) Open the copier's front cover, and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow. F-2-164 2) Turn the open/closed lever of the drum unit cover [1] counterclockwise by 90 deg to open the drum unit cover. F-2-165 3) Match the dent [1] found in the back of the drum unit cover and the protrusion [2] on the bottom face of the protective cover, and secure it in place.
Page 143 Chapter 2 1. Push it in the direction of the arrow [1] indicated on the top edge of the drum unit. 2. After setting the drum unit in place, be sure to store away the protective cover. Holding the protective cover [2] level, push in the drum unit (Y) [3] to set; the units are Y, M, C, and Bk, starting from the left.
Page 144 Chapter 2 2-68...
Page 145: Chapter 3 Basic Operation
Chapter 3 Basic Operation...
Page 147: Construction
Contents Contents 3.1 Construction ..............................3-1 3.1.1 Functional Construction ..........................3-1 3.1.2 Arrangement of Major PCBs ........................3-2 3.2 Basic Sequence ..............................3-5 3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ....................3-5 3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations ........................3-7...
Page 149: Construction
Chapter 3 3.1 Construction 3.1.1 Functional Construction 0000-4278 The machine can broadly be divided into the following functional blocks: Original exposure system Reader control system Printer control General control system system DC controller Main controller Image formation system [10] [11] Pickup/ [12] Side paper...
Page 150: Arrangement Of Major Pcbs
Chapter 3 3.1.2 Arrangement of Major PCBs 0006-8366 The machine's major PCBs are wired as indicated in the following diagram: Reader unit J102 J204 J206 J203 J103 J205 J307 J601 J303 Printer unit J511 J607 J608 J1301 J115 J114 J1209 J1303 [10] J1501,J1502...
Page 151 Chapter 3 [9] Main controller PCB (sub) [21] Heater control PCB [10] Main controller PCB (main) [22] DC power supply PCB (1) [11] Drive PCB [23] DC power supply PCB (2) [12] Duplex driver PCB The symbol <=> in the diagram indicates major wiring connections, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals. The major PCBs within the machine's main controller are connected as follows: J1400 [13]...
Page 152 Chapter 3 T-3-3 [1] Main controller PCB (sub) [8] Ethernet board [2] SRMA PCB [9] UFR board or Open I/F [3] HDD [10] USB interface board or TokenRing board [4] Main controller PCB (main) [11] Image conversion board [5] Image memory (SDRAM-: 512 MB, standard) [12] Power distribution PCB [6] Image memory (SDRAM: 512 MB, expansion) [13] Differential PCB...
Page 153: Basic Sequence
Chapter 3 3.2 Basic Sequence 3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On 0000-4280 T-3-4 Period Description WMUP (warm-up) From when the main power switch is turned on until the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C. SSTBY (scanner standby) From when shading correction ends until the Start key is turned on or the main power switch is turned off.
Page 154 Chapter 3 Main power switch ON Standby Reader unit WMUP SSTBY 30 sec Size detection/shading correction Original lamp (LA1) Scanner motor Home position search (M1) Starts here if, when the main power is turned ON, the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 90˚C or more Standby (at this time, the surface temperature of the fixing roller must...
Page 155: Basic Sequence Of Operations
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations 0000-4281 a. Full-Color full-color, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1 T-3-5 Period Description SSTBY From when shading ends until the Start key is turned ON or the main power is turned OFF. SREADY While shading correction is under way after a press on the Start key.
Page 156 Chapter 3 Start key ON Reader unit SCRV SSTBY SREADY SCFW Scanning lamp (LA1) Scanner motor (M1) Image formation Used to stabilize rotation Start key ON ready timing Printer unit (Bk: 2.5 sec Y/M/C: 3.5 sec) LSTR PSTBY PSTBY PINTR PRINT Laser scanner motor (M2 to M5)(Y,M,C,Bk)
Page 157 Chapter 3 Period Description SCRV While the scanner is returning to the home position after an original has been read. PSTBY (print standby) While the machine is ready to receive a print request signal. PSINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until when the image leading signal is received.
Page 158 Chapter 3 3-10...
Page 159: Chapter 4 Basic Operations (As A Printer)
Chapter 4 Basic Operations (As a Printer)
Page 161: Construction Of The Electrical Circuitry
Contents Contents 4.1 Construction ..............................4-1 4.1.1 Functional Construction ..........................4-1 4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry ......................4-2 4.2.1 Arrangement of Major PCBs ........................4-2 4.2.2 DC Controller PCB ............................ 4-4 4.3 Basic Sequence ..............................4-5 4.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ....................4-5 4.3.2 Basic Sequence of Operations ........................
Page 163: Construction
Chapter 4 4.1 Construction 4.1.1 Functional Construction 0000-4447 The machine can roughly be divided into the following functional blocks: Original exposure system Reader control system Printer control General control system system DC controller Main controller Image formation system [10] [11] [12] Pickup/ [13]...
Page 164: Construction Of The Electrical Circuitry
Chapter 4 4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry 4.2.1 Arrangement of Major PCBs 0006-8375 The machine's major PCBs are wired as follows: Printer unit J511 J607 J608 J1301 J115 J114 J1209 J1303 J1501,J1502 J102 J1508,J1509 J105 J100 J131 J814 J75,J92 [10] [11] [12]...
Page 165 Chapter 4 [6] Main controller PCB (main) [16] Fuse PCB [7] Drum ITB motor [17] Heater control PCB [8] Duplex driver PCB [18] DC power supply PCB (1) [9] High-voltage unit [19] DC power supply PCB (2) [10] HV1 PCB The arrow used in the diagram indicates connection of PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals.
Page 166: Dc Controller Pcb
Chapter 4 [5] 512-MB expansion RAM [11] Image conversion board or USB application interface board [6] 256/512MB expansion RAM [12] Power distribution PCB [7] Boot ROM [13] Differential PCB The arrow used in the diagram indicates connection of PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals. 4.2.2 DC Controller PCB 0000-4449 The following is a functional diagram of the DC controller PCB:...
Page 167: Basic Sequence
Chapter 4 4.3 Basic Sequence 4.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On 0000-4450 T-4-4 Period Description WMUP (warm-up) While the drive system is at rest and, in addition, until the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C. WMUPR (warm-up rotation) After the drive system starts up and, in addition, bias adjustment is under way.
Page 168 Chapter 4 Main power switch ON Standby Reader unit WMUP SSTBY 30 sec Size detection/shading correction Original lamp (LA1) Scanner motor Home position search (M1) Starts here if, when the main power is turned ON, the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 90˚C or more Standby (at this time, the surface temperature of the fixing roller must...
Page 169: Basic Sequence Of Operations
Chapter 4 4.3.2 Basic Sequence of Operations 0000-4451 a. Full-Color full-color, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1 T-4-5 Period Description PSTBY (print standby) While the machine is ready to accept a copy/print request signal. PINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until an image signal is sent.
Page 170 Chapter 4 b. Monochrome monochrome, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1 T-4-6 Period Description PSTBY (print standby) While the machine is ready to receive a copy/print request signal. PINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until the image signal is sent.
Page 171: Chapter 5 Main Controller
Chapter 5 Main Controller...
Page 173 Contents Contents 5.1 Construction ..............................5-1 5.1.1 Outline ................................ 5-1 5.1.2 Functional Construction ..........................5-2 5.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry ......................5-3 5.2.1 Outline ................................ 5-3 5.2.2 Main Controller PCB ..........................5-3 5.2.3 SRAM board ............................... 5-4 5.2.4 HDD ................................5-4 5.2.5 Composition of the System Software ......................
Page 174 Contents 5.7.2.8 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ................5-30 5.7.3 SRAM PCB .............................. 5-31 5.7.3.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................... 5-31 5.7.3.2 Removing the Controller Box Cover ....................5-31 5.7.3.3 Removing the HDD ........................... 5-31 5.7.3.4 Removing the SRAM PCB ........................ 5-31 5.7.3.5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB ......................
Page 175: Construction
Chapter 5 5.1 Construction 5.1.1 Outline 0006-8424 The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the main controller are as follows: Main controller PCB (main) Image memory (256 MB, expanded) (512 MB, standard) J1202 J1201 Flash ROM (for boot program) IC1003 Ethernet board connector slot (for support of...
Page 176: Functional Construction
Chapter 5 5.1.2 Functional Construction 0000-4282 The machine may be broadly divided into the following functional blocks (main controller indicated with shading): Retention of service mode settings/ HDD control information Image memory (SDRAM) Reader input image processing Reader unit Boot ROM SRAM board Accessory boards...
Page 177: Construction Of The Electrical Circuitry
Chapter 5 5.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry 5.2.1 Outline 0000-4283 The major mechanisms of the main controller PCB are controlled by the CPU on the main controller PCB. To save on physical space, the machineís main controller PCB is divided into two: main and sub. The sub PCB serves to process input images coming from the reader unit, while the main PCB serves to control jobs, output images going to the printer, and memory.
Page 178: Sram Board
Chapter 5 5.2.3 SRAM board 0006-4436 T-5-3 Description control information on image data stored on the HDD service mode settings data 5.2.4 HDD 0006-4439 The hard disk is divided into 9 partitions (blocks for storage of specific type of data), with each partition possessing its own functions: T-5-4 Partition...
Page 179: Composition Of The System Software
Chapter 5 DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5 F-5-4 5.2.5 Composition of the System Software 0006-4453 The following shows the construction of the machine's system software: T-5-5 System software Description Location Remarks SYSTEM system module (controls system HDD(BOOTDEV) as a whole) Language...
Page 180 Chapter 5 RCON Reader controller PCB DC controller PCB DCON G3Fax board G3FAX BOOT SYSTEM Language BOOTDEV BOOTDEV TDEV Main controller PCB F-5-5...
Page 181: Start-Up Sequence
Chapter 5 5.3 Start-Up Sequence 5.3.1 Outline 0000-4285 The system control software used to control the machine is stored on the HDD. At time of startup, the CPU on the controller PCB follows the boot program to read the system software from the HDD to the Image Memory (SDRAM) on the controller PCB.
Page 182 Chapter 5 When all the foregoing ends normally, the machine becomes ready to accept jobs. (The operation screen will appear on the control panel, and the LED on the Start key changes from red to green.) - Self Diagnosis Program Is Under Way Image memory SDRAM System Image...
Page 183: Actions When Hdd Error
Chapter 5 5.4 Actions when HDD Error 5.4.1 E602 in Detail 0006-4492 In the even that the machine suffers a fault associated with E602-xxyy, different actions are required depending on the detail code: If the machine indicates E602-xxyy, be sure to turn it off and then on once (so that it will execute automatic recovery sequence).
Page 184 Chapter 5 T-5-7 Partition Description DOSDEV The machine suffers a read error at time of start-up. FSTDEV Action: DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 - if xxyy = 0701, 0702 PDLDEV Action: DOSDEV4 Ask the user to collect address book data, BOOTDEV transfer settings, and user mode data using RUI DOSDEV5 before starting the work.
Page 185 Chapter 5 Partition Description 11,21 The HDD has poor contact. Action: Turn off the main power. Check the 2 types of cable (power, IDE) coming from the HDD; then, turn the power back on. At that time, check to see that the HDD rotates and it is supplied with power.
Page 186 Chapter 5 1) Replace the main controller (main) board. 2) Mount the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM (removed from the previous board) to the new board. 1) ** Start up in save mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 2 and 8 keys.) 2) Execute HDD formatting using the SST (ALL);...
Page 187 Chapter 5 - HDD Format Partition CHK- Data items that will be lost TYPE DOSDEV4 user data (address book data, transfer settings, system software) BOOTDEV DOSDEV5 unselected 5-13...
Page 188: Image Processing
Chapter 5 5.5 Image Processing 5.5.1 Flow of Images 0000-4288 The following diagram shows the flow of images in relation to the machine's various functions: Other iR machine Original • SEND • Copy Scan • PullScan • E-Mail Image data Print output •...
Page 189: Construction Of The Image Processing Module
Chapter 5 5.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module 0000-4292 The machine's major image processing is undertaken by the main controller; the construction of the modules involved in image processing is as follows: Image memory (SDRAM) Reader input image processing block Processes the image data read by the reader unit.
Page 190: Reader Input Image Processing
Chapter 5 5.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing 0000-4293 The image data read by the reader unit (RGB data) is processed by the main controller PCB (sub). Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) Processing that takes the RG phase correction place of conventional input Black text masking;...
Page 191: Compression/Decompression And Edit Processing Black
Chapter 5 5.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Edit Processing Black 0000-4294 The machine uses IC1015 to undertake compression/decompression and edit processing. Reader unit Main controller PCB (main) Main controller PCB (sub) Image area signal IC1015 PDL input SDRAM JPEG compression Resolution conversion Enlargement/reduction JPEG decompression Rotation...
Page 192: Printer Output Image Processing
Chapter 5 5.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing 0000-4295 In this block, the machine processes image data coming from IC1015 for output to the printer. Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) Image area signal IC1015 If ACS identifies the original as being black-and-white, the Bk Image area signal is generated here...
Page 193: Flow Of Image Data
Chapter 5 5.6 Flow of Image Data 5.6.1 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions 0000-4296 The following shows the flow of image data when copier functions are used: Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) image area signal Main controller PCB (main) DC controller PCB JPEG Magnification...
Page 194: Flow Of Image Data For Box Functions
Chapter 5 5.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions 0000-4297 The following shows the flow of image data when Box functions are used: Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) image area signal Main controller PCB (main) DC controller PCB JPEG Decompression decompression...
Page 195: Flow Of Image Data For Send Function
Chapter 5 5.6.3 Flow of Image data for SEND function 0000-4298 The following shows the flow of image data for SEND functions: Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) image area signal Main controller PCB (main) Resolution JPEG conversion decompression for B/Wimage Binary Rotation processing...
Page 196: Flow Of Image Data For Fax Transmission Functions
Chapter 5 5.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions 0000-4299 The following is the flow of image data for fax transmission functions: Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) image area signal Main controller PCB (main) Resolution JPEG conversion compression JPEG Rotation...
Page 197: Flow Of Image Data For Fax Reception Functions
Chapter 5 5.6.5 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions 0000-4300 The following is the flow of image data for fax reception functions: DC controller PCB Main controller PCB (main) Resolution conversion Rotation SDRAM Image conversion board Fax board F-5-18 5-23...
Page 198: Flow Of Image Data For Pdl Functions
Chapter 5 5.6.6 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions 0000-4301 The following is the flow of image data for PDL functions: Reader unit Printer unit Main controller Main controller PCB (main) PCB (sub) SDRAM IC1015 JPEG IC1003 decompression IC1018 JPEG compression UFR board CMYK...
Page 199: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 5 Parts Replacement Procedure 5.7.1 Main Controller PCB (main) 5.7.1.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-4303 1) Remove the upper rear cover. F-5-21 5.7.1.2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000-4308 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 5.7.1.4 Removing Controller Box Cover 0000-4310...
Page 200: Removing The Hdd
Chapter 5 5.7.1.5 Removing the HDD 5.7.1.7 Removing the Ethernet 0000-4311 Board 0000-4313 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet board [2] together with its mounting plate. Points to Note When Removing the HDD When removing the HDD, be sure to take full care against damage by static discharge.
Page 201: Removing The Ufr Board
Chapter 5 5.7.1.8 Removing the UFR Board 0000-4314 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the UFR board [2] together with its mounting plate. F-5-29 5.7.1.10 Removing the Main F-5-27 Controller PCB (sub) 0000-4316 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the UFR board remove the flat cable [1].
Page 202: Removing The Main Controller Pcb (Main)
Chapter 5 5.7.1.11 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main) 0000-4317 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used for connection to the DC controller PCB. F-5-34 F-5-32 2) Disconnect the connectors of the PCB; then, remove the 10 screws [1], and detach the main controller PCB (main) [2].
Page 203: Removing The Hdd
Chapter 5 5.7.2.5 Removing the Hard Disk Mounting Plates 0000-4325 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the 2 hard disk mounting plates [2]. F-5-38 F-5-36 5.7.2.4 Removing the HDD 0000-4324 Points to Note When Removing the HDD When removing the HDD, be sure to take full care against damage by static discharge.
Page 204: Removing The Sram Pcb
Chapter 5 5.7.2.6 Removing the SRAM 0000-4326 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the SRAM PCB [2]. F-5-41 5.7.2.8 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) 0000-4329 F-5-39 Be sure to use the SRAM PCB [1] from the old PCB on the new main controller PCB (sub) [2].
Page 205: Sram Pcb
Chapter 5 5.7.3 SRAM PCB 5.7.3.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-4331 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 5.7.3.2 Removing Controller Box Cover 0000-4332 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power distribution PCB, and free the harness from the wire saddle [2];...
Page 206: Removing The Left Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 5 1) When you turn on the power after replacing the SRAM PCB, the machine will execute automatic initialization and will indicate a message on its panel to the effect that you are to turn off and then on the power switch found on its right side. Follow the message and turn off and then on the machine.
Page 207: Removing The Ethernet Board
Chapter 5 F-5-48 5.7.5 Ethernet Board 5.7.5.1 Removing the Upper F-5-49 Rear Cover 0000-4343 5.7.5.4 Removing the Ethernet 1) Remove the upper rear cover. Board 0000-4346 5.7.5.2 Removing the Left 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet Upper Rear Cover board [2] together with its mounting plate.
Page 208: Differential Pcb
Chapter 5 F-5-51 5.7.6 Differential PCB F-5-52 5.7.6.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-4348 5.7.6.4 Removing 1) Remove the upper rear cover. Differential PCB 0000-4351 1) Remove the flat cable [1]. 5.7.6.2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000-4349 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 5.7.6.3 Removing Controller Box Cover...
Page 209: Power Distribution Pcb
Chapter 5 5.7.8 HDD 5.7.8.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-4357 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 5.7.8.2 Removing Controller Box Cover 0000-4358 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power F-5-54 distribution PCB, and free the harness from the wire saddle [2];...
Page 210: When Replacing The Hdd
Chapter 5 control settings>group ID control>count control; then, check to see that IDs from 00000001 through 00001000 have been prepared. Make the following selections: user mode>system control settings>network settings>TCP/IP settings>IP address; then, set up 'IP address' 'gateway address' and 'subnet mask' Make the following selections: user mode>system administrator setup;...
Page 211: Controller Fan
Chapter 5 5.7.9 Controller Fan 5.7.9.3 Removing Controller Fan 0000-4302 5.7.9.1 Removing the Upper 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the controller fan [3]. Rear Cover 0000-8501 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 5.7.9.2 Removing Controller Box Cover...
Page 212 Chapter 5 5-38...
Page 213: Chapter 6 Original Exposure System
Chapter 6 Original Exposure System...
Page 215: Parts Replacement Procedure
Contents Contents 6.1 Construction ..............................6-1 6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................. 6-1 6.1.2 Major Components ............................. 6-1 6.1.3 Construction of the Control System ......................6-4 6.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ..........................6-4 6.2 Basic Sequence ..............................6-5 6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ....................6-5 6.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode, 1 original) .....
Page 216 Contents 6.4.6.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ......................6-22 6.4.6.2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover ......................6-23 6.4.6.3 Removing the Original Size Detection Unit ..................6-23 6.4.6.4 Removing the CCD Unit ........................6-24 6.4.6.5 After Replacing the CCD Unit ......................6-24 6.4.7 Fuse PCB (option) .............................
Page 217: Construction
Chapter 6 6.1 Construction 6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0006-0654 The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the original exposure system are as follows: T-6-1 Item Description Scanning lamp Xenon lamp Original scanning in book mode: by moving the scanner in ADF mode: by moving the scanner Reading resolution 600 dpi (main scanning) x 600 dpi (sub scanning)
Page 218 Chapter 6 Component Notation Description Copyboard cover open/ photointerrupter (copyboard cover state (open/closed) closed sensor detection; identifies as being "Closed"when the copyboard is brought down to 30 deg or lower) Mirror No. 1/No. 2/No. 3 mirror Scanner motor Scanner HP sensor Reader controller PCB Interface PCB CCD unit...
Page 219 Chapter 6 Scanner motor (M1) Light-blocking plate Scanning Scanner HP lamp (LA1) sensor (PS2) (forward) (reverse) No. 1 mirror base No. 2 mirror base F-6-3 Scanner motor (M1) Light-blocking plate Scanning Scanner HP lamp (LA1) sensor (SR2) (forward) (reverse) No. 1 mirror base No.
Page 220: Construction Of The Control System
Chapter 6 6.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0000-4384 The control system of the original exposure system is constructed as follows: Scanner motor (M1) Scanner motor drive control Reader controller PCB To printer Interface PCB (main controller) CCD unit To DF Copyboard cover open/closed sensor Scanning lamp...
Page 221: Basic Sequence
Chapter 6 6.2 Basic Sequence 6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On 0000-4386 CCD output gain adjustment (for color original) ON (to stabilize lamp intensity) CCD output gain adjustment Main power (for black-and-white original) switch ON SREADY STBY Scanner HP sensor (PS2) Scanning lamp (LA1)
Page 222: Basic Sequence Of Operations In Response To A Press On The Start Key (Book Mode, 1 Original)
Chapter 6 6.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode, 1 original) 0000-4387 Shading correction Shading correction (for 1st sheet) (for 2nd sheet) Start key STBY SREADY SCFW SCRW STBY Scanner HP sensor (PS2) Scanning lamp (LA1)
Page 223: Various Control Mechanisms
Chapter 6 6.3 Various Control Mechanisms 6.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System 6.3.1.1 Outline 0000-4388 The following shows the parts associated with the scanner drive system: Reader Interface controller Scanner motor (M1) Light-blocking Scanning lamp plate (LA1) (forward) (reverse) Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (PS1) Scanner HP...
Page 224: Controlling The Scanner Motor
Chapter 6 6.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor 0000-4389 The following shows the construction of the control system of the scanner motor; the motor driver operates in response to signals from the CPU to turn on/off the scanner motor or to control the direction/speed of its rotation. Reader controller PCB Interface PCB Scanner...
Page 225: Enlargement/Reduction
Chapter 6 6.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction 6.3.2.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio 0000-4390 1. in copyboard cover mode, 100% 2. in ADF mode, 100% MEMO: - The speed of scanning is 234 mm/sec in black-and-white copy or black-and-white SEND mode (reduction by 50%); to make up for the difference, the reading speed of the CCD is doubled, ultimately resulting in a 100% reproduction ratio.
Page 226: Scanning Lamp
Chapter 6 6.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp 0000-4394 The machine's scanning lamp is a xenon lamp made up of a glass tube in which xenon gas is sealed. On the outside of the tube are 2 terminals laid in parallel in axial direction, while the inner side of the tube is coated with fluorescent material.
Page 227: Points Of Detection (Original Size)
Chapter 6 The combination of these outputs is used to identify the size of the original. For specific operation, see the pages that follow. 6.3.4.2 Points of Detection (original size) 0000-4398 For main scanning direction, the No. 1 mirror base is moved to the following positions to measure the intensity of light at each point of detection.
Page 228 Chapter 6 3. The copyboard cover is closed. - If the external light is blocked, the machine assumes the presence of an original; outside the Original area, where light is detected, the machine (A4R) assumes that there is no original. (search for (external light) external light) At this point in time, B5, B4, A4, and A3 are...
Page 229 Chapter 6 AB-configuration Inch-configuration CCD detection Original CCD detection position Original Original Original Original position size sensor 1 size sensor 1 sensor 2 11" X 17" LTRR None :change absent : change present None F-6-17 6-13...
Page 230: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 6 Parts Replacement Procedure 6.4.1 Copyboard Glass 6.4.1.1 Removing Copyboard Glass 0000-4400 F-6-19 1) Open the ADF or the copyboard cover. 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3]. Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard Glass When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to...
Page 231: Exposure Lamp
Chapter 6 6.4.2 Exposure Lamp 6.4.2.1 Removing Copyboard Glass 0000-8280 1) Open the ADF or the copyboard cover. F-6-23 Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard Glass When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind retainer [2];...
Page 232: Removing The Scanning Lamp
Chapter 6 3) Slide the No. 1 mirror base [1] until it matches against the cut-off in the frame; then, remove the 3 screws [2], and remove the scanning lamp [3]. F-6-25 6.4.2.4 Removing the Scanning Lamp 0000-4426 F-6-28 1) Peel the sheet [1] (1 each at front and rear) of the reader frame.
Page 233: Reader Controller Pcb
Chapter 6 6.4.3 Reader Controller PCB 6.4.3.1 Removing Copyboard Glass 0000-8290 1) Open the ADF or the copyboard cover. F-6-31 Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard Glass When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind retainer [2];...
Page 234: Removing The Original Size Detection Unit
Chapter 6 6.4.3.3 Removing the Original Size Detection Unit J203 J202 0000-8293 J210 IC14 IC16 (CPU) 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 J201 J204 J206 J205 J207 J208 screws [2]; then, detach the original size detection F-6-36 unit [3].
Page 235: Interface Pcb
Chapter 6 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-GB Use it to enter a color displacement correction value for sub scanning direction. COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-RG Use it to enter a color displacement correction value for sub scanning direction. COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-GB Use it to enter a color displacement correction value for sub scanning direction.
Page 236: Removing The Reader Rear Cover
Chapter 6 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3]. F-6-41 6.4.4.3 Removing the Interface F-6-39 0000-4403 6.4.4.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0000-4402 1) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader Points to Note Before Removing the Interface PCB power cable.
Page 237: Inverter Pcb
Chapter 6 6.4.5 Inverter PCB 6.4.5.1 Removing Copyboard Glass 0000-8287 1) Open the ADF or the copyboard cover. Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard F-6-43 Glass When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind connectors [2];...
Page 238: Removing The Copyboard Glass
Chapter 6 6.4.5.3 Removing the Inverter 0000-4431 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the flat cable; then, remove the screw [3], and detach the inverter PCB [4]. F-6-47 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass retainer [2];...
Page 239: Removing The Ccd Unit Cover
Chapter 6 F-6-53 6.4.6.2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover 0000-8285 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the CCD unit cover [2]. F-6-51 F-6-54 6.4.6.3 Removing the Original F-6-52 Size Detection Unit 0000-8286 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 screws [2];...
Page 240: Removing The Ccd Unit
Chapter 6 6.4.7 Fuse PCB (option) 6.4.7.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0000-4411 1) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader power cable. F-6-55 6.4.6.4 Removing the CCD Unit 0000-4429 4) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] of the reader controller F-6-57 PCB, 2 screws [2], and leaf spring [3];...
Page 241: Removing The Fuse Pcb Unit (Option; 100/230V Model Only)
Chapter 6 (The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images.) If dirt is found, be sure to remove it using lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. F-6-59 6.4.7.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit (option; 100/230v model only) 0000-4413 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], ad remove the 2 screws [2];...
Page 242: Removing The Reader Rear Cover
Chapter 6 6.4.8.3 Removing the Interface 0000-4420 Points to Note Before Removing the Interface PCB Without detaching the motor unit, mark its position of the rear side plate using a scriber [A]. F-6-63 6.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0000-4419 1) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader power cable.
Page 243: Removing The Scanner Motor
Chapter 6 2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the scanner motor [2]. F-6-68 F-6-71 3) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] and the 2 flat cables [2], and remove the 5 screws [3] then, detach 6.4.8.5 Mounting the Scanner the interface PCB unit [4].
Page 244: Original Cover Sensor
Chapter 6 F-6-73 F-6-75 6.4.9.2 Removing Copyboard Cover Open/ Points to Note After Mounting the Scanner Motor Closed Sensor Mounting 0006-7327 When you have mounted the motor, either move the 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the sensor mirror or make a test print (so as to be sure that the base [2].
Page 245: Scanner Hp Sensor
Chapter 6 6.4.9.3 Removing Copyboard Cover Open/ Closed Sensor Cover 0000-4406 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screws [2]; then, detach the sensor cover [3]. F-6-79 2) Disconnect the reader controller communications cable. 3) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the reader rear cover [2].
Page 246: Removing The Mirror Base Home Position Sensor
Chapter 6 6.4.10.3 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor 0000-4410 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the mirror base home position sensor [2]. F-6-82 6.4.11 Original Sensor 6.4.11.1 Removing F-6-83 Copyboard Glass 0000-8281 1) Open the ADF or the copyboard cover. Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard Glass When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to...
Page 247: Removing The Copyboard Glass
Chapter 6 F-6-85 F-6-87 6.4.11.2 Removing the CCD 6.4.11.4 Removing the Original Unit Cover 0000-8282 Size Sensor 0000-4428 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the CCD unit 1) While freeing the claw at the edge, detach the cover [2]. original size sensor [1].
Page 248: Removing The Reader Rear Cover
Chapter 6 If dirt is found, be sure to remove it using lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. F-6-91 6.4.12.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0000-4415 1) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader power cable. F-6-89 F-6-92 2) Disconnect the reader controller communications cable.
Page 249: Removing The Fuse Pcb Unit
Chapter 6 6.4.12.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit 0000-4416 1) Remove the fuse PCB unit. 6.4.12.4 Removing the Reader Heater (option; 100/230V model only) 0000-4417 1) Move the No. 1 mirror base [1] into the direction of the arrow. F-6-96 2) Remove the 3 screws used to secure the Reader heater [1] in place, and remove the harness band [3].
Page 250 Chapter 6 6-34...
Page 251: Chapter 7 Image Processing System
Chapter 7 Image Processing System...
Page 253 Contents Contents 7.1 Outline ................................7-1 7.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................. 7-1 7.1.2 Functional Construction of the PCBs ......................7-1 7.2 Analog Image Processing ..........................7-2 7.2.1 Outline ................................ 7-2 7.2.2 CCD Drive ..............................7-3 7.2.3 CCD Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction ................. 7-3 7.2.4 A/D Conversion of CCD Putput .........................
Page 255: Outline
Chapter 7 7.1 Outline 7.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0000-4434 The machine's image processing system has the following specifications and functions: T-7-1 CCD (image sensor) number of lines:3 (RGB, 1 line each) number of pixels:7350 size of pixel:9.3X9.3 um Shading Correction shading adjustment: executed in service mode shading correction: executed for each copy...
Page 256: Analog Image Processing
Chapter 7 7.2 Analog Image Processing 7.2.1 Outline 0000-4436 The machine uses the CCD/AP PCB to perform analog image processing for each RGB line; the major operations involved are as follows: T-7-3 CCD drive CCD output gain correction, offset correction CCD output A/D conversion CCD (RGB, 1 line each) J101...
Page 257: Ccd Drive
Chapter 7 7.2.2 CCD Drive 0000-4437 The CCD sensor used in the machine is a 3-line (RGB, 1 line each) linear image sensor consisting of photocells of 7350 pixels. The signals photo-converted by the light-receiving block are sent out as analog signals of 2 channels (even-numbered pixels EVEN and odd-numbered pixels ODD).
Page 258: Digital Image Processing
Chapter 7 7.3 Digital Image Processing 7.3.1 Outline 0006-0674 The machine uses the reader controller PCB for digital image processing; the major operations involved are as follows: 1. Shading Correction Reader controller PCB J101 J204 Gain EEP-ROM Target correction data value SRAM CCD/AP...
Page 259 Chapter 7 Characteristics CCD output after correction Characteristics Target value before correction Measurement taken White Density of original Standard white plate F-7-5...
Page 260 Chapter 7...
Page 261: Chapter 8 Laser Exposure
Chapter 8 Laser Exposure...
Page 263: Parts Replacement Procedure
Contents Contents 8.1 Construction ..............................8-1 8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................. 8-1 8.1.2 Major Components ............................. 8-2 8.1.3 Construction of the Control System ......................8-3 8.2 Basic Sequence ..............................8-4 8.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations ........................8-4 8.3 Various Control ..............................8-5 8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing ....................
Page 265: Construction
Chapter 8 8.1 Construction 8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0000-4452 T-8-1 Laser light Wave length 780 nm (infrared) Output 5 mW Number of laser beams T-8-2 Scanner motor Type of motor DC brush-less Number of revolutions 23000 rpm (approx.) Type of bearing T-8-3 Polygon mirror...
Page 266: Major Components
Chapter 8 8.1.2 Major Components 0000-4453 T-8-5 Name Description Laser driver generates laser light. Polygon mirror scans the laser beam in main scanning direction. guide mirror directs laser light in the direction of the drum. Corrective lens corrects displacement of laser light coming from the guide mirror in main scanning direction.
Page 267: Construction Of The Control System
Chapter 8 BD detection PCB BD mirror F-8-2 8.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0000-4454 The laser exposure system is controlled mainly by the DC controller PCB. Laser scanner motor control ON/OFF signal control Main Main scanning direction scanning control sync control direction correction...
Page 268: Basic Sequence
Chapter 8 8.2 Basic Sequence 8.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations 0000-4455 The laser scanner motor starts to rotate when the Start key is pressed (or the print request signal is issued). When its rotation has stabilized, the printer unit becomes ready for formation of images, causing the printer side to generate the sync signal (PTOP).
Page 269: Various Control
Chapter 8 8.3 Various Control 8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing 8.3.1.1 Turning On/Off the Laser 0000-4456 The laser light is turned on/off in keeping with combinations of control signals (TRL0/1/2) from the DC controller PCB. T-8-6 Status of laser A Status of laser B APC control (bias current applied)
Page 270 Chapter 8 J114 for M: J116 for C: J118 for Bk: J120 DC controller PCB F-8-5 Print request signal Image formation (Start key ON) enable timing PSTBY PINTR PRINT Polygon motor (Y, M, C, Bk) PTOP signal Y-TOP signal Laser ON For laser A BD detection, APC control ON For laser B...
Page 271: Bd Signal
Chapter 8 8.3.1.2 BD Signal 0000-4457 - The machine is equipped with a laser unit that can generate 2 channels of laser light (A and B). - These 2 channels of laser light are based on separate BD signals. BD signal J115 separation BD for...
Page 272: Controlling Synchronization In Main Scanning Direction
Chapter 8 8.3.1.3 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction 0000-4458 The control of synchronization in main scanning direction is based on the BD signal. BD detection PCB The BD signal is separated into 2 channels for laser A and laser B. Clock signals/ sync signals J115...
Page 273: Controlling The Intensity Of Laser Light
Chapter 8 Print request signal Image formation (Start key ON) enable timing PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY Used to stabilize Laser scanner rotation (3.5sec) motor (Y,M,C,Bk) PTOP signal Y-TOP signal Laser Y ON M-TOP signal Laser M ON C-TOP signal Laser C signal Bk-TOP signal Laser Bk ON...
Page 274: Controlling The Laser Scanner Motor
Chapter 8 8.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 8.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 0000-4462 The machine uses the acceleration/deceleration signal to control the speed of rotation of the laser scanner motor so that the BD signal from individual laser units will be of the same phase as the reference signal (if the BD signal is behind the reference signal, accelerate;...
Page 275: Correcting Image Displacement
Chapter 8 Front cover switch Manual feed unit open/closed switch Fixing feeder unit open/closed switch DC power supply unit Front cover open/closed sensor PWMIC Control IC PS23 Manual feed unit open/closed sensor PS28 Fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor DC controller PCB F-8-12 8.3.5 Correcting Image Displacement 8.3.5.1 Outline...
Page 276: Timing Of Color Displacement Detection/Correction
Chapter 8 Detecting displacement in color • Forms an image position correction pattern on the transfer belt (direct transfer). • Reads the individual pattern (of different colors) using the pattern reader photo sensors. • Identifies displacement in color with reference to the pattern signals in the DC controller.
Page 277: Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement In Sub Scanning Direction
Chapter 8 power mode - 2 hr after the machine has been left alone in standby state - during quick correction (auto gradation correction) - after sheet-to-sheet auto correction when 300 sheets (small-size, equivalent in single-sided) have been fed continuously - during last rotation auto correction at time of counter increments occurring after intermittent jobs of 300 pages (small-size, equivalent of single-sided) - in response to changes in the environment...
Page 278: Detecting/Correcting The Angle In Main Scanning Direction
Chapter 8 8.3.5.4 Detecting/Correcting the Angle in Main Scanning Direction 0000-4467 The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine identifies the angle in main scanning direction with reference to front/rear discrepancies of individual colors. rear Displacement front F-8-17 Angle F-8-18 If the machine detects any angle, it turns on the main scanning direction angle correction motor located inside the...
Page 279 Chapter 8 Main scanning direction correction motor Main scanning direction angle correction lens F-8-19 8-15...
Page 280: Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement In Main Scanning Direction
Chapter 8 8.3.5.5 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Main Scanning Direction 0000-4468 The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine compares the length of the center line of the Bk image position correction pattern (front) and the length of the center line of the image position correction pattern (front) of individual colors, and identifies the difference between the two as the degree of color displacement in main scanning direction.
Page 281: Detecting/Correcting Changes In The Reproduction Ratio In Main Scanning Direction
Chapter 8 8.3.5.6 Detecting/Correcting Changes in the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction 0000-4469 The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine copies the center line of the Bk image correction pattern (rear) and the center line of the individual image position correction patterns (rear), and identifies the difference between the two as the change in the reproduction ratio in main scanning direction.
Page 282 Chapter 8 Change in reproduction ratio in main scanning direction PWMIC Video signal for laser A Video signal for laser B Frequency control block The machine changes the frequency of the image clock to change the reproduction DC controller PCB ratio in main scanning direction.
Page 283: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 8 Parts Replacement Procedure 8.4.1 Laser Unit 8.4.1.1 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 0000-4289 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center F-8-26 delivery tray [2]. 3) Remove the face cap [1] and the screw [2]; then, while lifting the rear reader unit [3] slightly, detach the upper inside cover [4].
Page 284: After Replacing The Laser Unit
Chapter 8 F-8-31 F-8-29 6) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the cover [2] MEMO: of the laser driver PCB. (The cover for Y has a When mounting the laser unit, tighten the screws in different shape, but may be removed in the same diagonal sequence for proper balance.
Page 285: Chapter 9 Image Formation
Chapter 9 Image Formation...
Page 287 Contents Contents 9.1 Construction ..............................9-1 9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................. 9-1 9.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System ................. 9-3 9.1.3 Charging Specifications ..........................9-4 9.2 Image Formation Process ..........................9-6 9.2.1 Image Formation Process (general) ......................9-6 9.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) .....................
Page 288: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb Cover
Contents 9.7.2.1 Controlling the Transfer Bias ......................9-42 9.7.3 Cleaning ..............................9-44 9.7.3.1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) ....................... 9-44 9.7.3.2 Secondary External Roller ......................... 9-45 9.7.3.3 Collecting Waste Toner ........................9-45 9.7.4 Separation Mechanism ..........................9-46 9.7.4.1 Separation ............................9-46 9.8 Parts Replacement Procedure ..........................
Page 289 Contents 9.8.4.8 Removing the Developing Motor (Bk) ....................9-65 9.8.5 Developing Motor (Y/M/C) ........................9-65 9.8.5.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ...................... 9-65 9.8.5.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ...................... 9-65 9.8.5.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ....................9-65 9.8.5.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ....................
Page 290 Contents 9.8.15 Feedscrew Rotation Sensor ........................9-86 9.8.15.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container ..................... 9-86 9.8.15.2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ..................... 9-87 9.8.15.3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ....................9-87 9.8.15.4 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ..................... 9-87 9.8.15.5 Removing the Controller Box Cover ....................
Page 291 Contents...
Page 293: Construction
Chapter 9 9.1 Construction 9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0000-4473 T-9-1 Photosensitive drum Drum unit Type of drum (D-UNIT) Diameter of drum 30.6 mm Cleaning mechanism Cleaner-less The residual toner after transfer is charged for collection by the developing assembly.
Page 294 Chapter 9 T-9-4 Auxiliary brush Type of brush fur brush Intrusion of brush 1.3 mm (upstream) 1.3 mm (downstream) T-9-5 Others Items of control by internal memory color of toner inside drum unit cumulative number of prints cumulative number of video counts data on life of drum unit data on toner supply control T-9-6...
Page 295: Major Components Of The Image Formation System
Chapter 9 T-9-9 Image stabili- Descharge current level control to prevent image faults caused by zation mecha- changes in environment nism ATVC control to ensure good transfer ATR control to correct toner density (about) PASCAL control to correct image gradation characteristics SALT-Dmax control to correct development density...
Page 296: Charging Specifications
Chapter 9 9.1.3 Charging Specifications 0000-4475 Drum unit (high voltage) T-9-10 Photosensitive drum charging Method of primary charging roller contact AC component rating specifications range 1300 to 2000 Vp-p (standard: 1500 Vp-p) DC component rating specifications range -300 to -700 V (standard: -450 V) AC component voltage correction factor environment sensor DC component voltage correction factor...
Page 297 Chapter 9 Primary transfer Voltage control factor environment sensor, print mode* T-9-14 Secondary transfer Method of transfer roller Object of transfer paper (transfer media) DC component rating use range -2500 to +7000 V Voltage correction factor paper type, environment sensor reading, print mode* *Full color or monochrome mode.
Page 298: Image Formation Process
Chapter 9 9.2 Image Formation Process 9.2.1 Image Formation Process (general) 0000-4476 T-9-15 Functional block STEP Description Electrostatic latent image formation 1, 2 forms an electrostatic latent image on the block photosensitive drum. Development block deposits toner over the electrostatic latent image, thereby turning it into a visible image.
Page 299: Image Formation Process (Image Formation)
Chapter 9 9.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) 0000-4477 Toner not charged to a negative potential by the downstream brush Photosensitive drum cleaning block [6] Colled to the developing assembly. [5] Charging to a negative potential by friction against the cleaning sheet. - - - - [4] Charging to a negative potential by the downstream...
Page 300: Basic Sequence
Chapter 9 9.3 Basic Sequence 9.3.1 At Power-On (1) 0000-4479 If the main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 100°C (e.g., first time in the morning or after a long period of no use), Characteristics - the same control timing is used for the Y, M, C, and Bk drum units.
Page 301: During Copying/Printing Operations (Normal Speed)
Chapter 9 image position correction *If the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 100°C after jam recovery, the machine uses the sequence it uses at power-on (1). Main power switch ON WMUPR PSTBY CNTR Approx. 30sec Approx. 50sec Drum/ITB motor (M1) Exposure (Y)
Page 302: Making Copies/Prints (Half Speed)
Chapter 9 When Making Y/M/C Monochrome Copies/Prints If not for Bk (i.e., for Y, M, C), a high voltage is applied for the 4 colors as for full-color output when making monochrome copies/prints. (Exposure is not executed for colors other than those in question.) When Making Bk Monochrome Copies/Prints When making Bk monochrome copies/prints, no high voltage is applied for Y or M, and the developing motors for these colors are not driven.
Page 303: Printing Originals Containing A Color Page
Chapter 9 SALT-Dmax control image position correctionSALT-Dhalf control New drum unit fitted, and front cover closed WMUPR CNTR PSTBY Approx. 30sec Approx. 120sec Approx. 120sec Drum/ITB motor (M1) Exposure (Y) Charging (DC) bias (Y) Charging (AC) bias (Y) Image stabilization Development control (for details, see motor (Y)
Page 304 Chapter 9 controller Toner container motor drive signal J126 Developing motor drive signal J110 Toner drive motor Drum/ITB motor drive signal J105 Developing motor Drum/ITB motor F-9-11 High-Voltage Control The high-voltage unit is used to supply high voltage to each of the blocks in the image formation system. (For details, see the appropriate sections.) Primary charging Developing...
Page 305: Image Stabilization Control
Chapter 9 9.4 Image Stabilization Control 9.4.1 Outline of Image Quality Control 0000-4486 Changes in temperature/humidity or passage of time can cause the machine to produce images of varying quality. To ensure that the quality of images remain stable, the levels of voltage outputs and volumes of toner supply are corrected: T-9-17 So that the machine's image...
Page 306 Chapter 9 T-9-19 if the number of rotations made by the toner feedscrew has reached the threshold and, toner in addition, the reading of the ATR sensor is lower than a specific value *8 container about replacem if the number of rotations of the toner feedscrew has reached a specific value (100%) *8 about 20 T-9-20 Drum...
Page 307 Chapter 9 T-9-23 Left alone in about STBY for 2 hr *3 /Rapid change in environment T-9-24 Return - cover is not opened and closed during low power mode from low about 30 *4 power - cover is opened and closed during low power mode mode about 80 *6 state...
Page 308 Chapter 9 Cumulative output is 100 pages or more and less 1st page 2nd page 99th page 105th page next job * than 200 pages Continuous jobs Control executed during post rotation Control executed also of last sheet of job in excess of 100 pages during initial rotation of next job * Cumulative output...
Page 309: Atr Control
Chapter 9 9.4.3 ATR Control 0000-4488 The machine executes ATR control to maintain a specific image density, which otherwise would change as more and more toner is used. The machine measures the concentration of toner and adjusts its supply. Forms a sample image (every specific number of pages) Measures the concentration of toner inside the developing...
Page 310: Atvc Control (Transfer Bias Level Correction)
9.4.5 ATVC Control (transfer bias level correction) 0000-4490 The ATVC control mechanism is used to determine the optimum level of transfer voltage for transfer of images from the photosensitive drum to the ITB, and from the ITB to paper. The level of transfer voltage is corrected in relation to changes in temperature/humidity, deterioration of rollers, and types of paper.
Page 311: Salt-Dmax Control (Development Characteristics Correction)
Chapter 9 - Service Person Interaction The mechanism is executed when 'full correction'is executed while auto gradation correction is under way in user mode. MEMO; Differences Among 3 Test Patterns - Test Print 1 It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of error diffusion processing, which is not subject to moire and, therefore, used in text/photo/map, print photo, and text mode.
Page 312: Salt-Dhalf Control (Development Characteristics Correction)
Chapter 9 Uses the SALT sensor to take the reading. Converts density (performs computation using the measurement taken). Determines the charging DC bias, developing DC bias, and primary charging current level. Timing of Control - Service Person InteractionThe mechanism is executed when 'full correction' or 'quick correction' of auto gradation correction is under way in user mode.
Page 313 Chapter 9 Performs density conversion (performs computation using the measurement taken). Prepares an image correction table B/C (data processing). - Non-AutomaticThe mechanism is executed when 'full correction'or 'quick correction' is under way in user mode. COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CAL-SW Use it to change the conditions that initiate automatic control. default: 0 (disable gradation density control for half speed) SALT sensor F-9-18...
Page 314: Auto Gradation Control
Chapter 9 9.4.9 Auto Gradation Control 0000-4494 Outline The auto gradation control mechanism is used to correct image gradation by correcting the laser output so as to obtain ideal gradation characteristics. Image density Actual gradation characteristics 1.45 Ideal characteristics Relationship between laser output and image density F-9-19 T-9-27...
Page 315: Salt-Dhalf Control (Development Characteristics Correction)
Chapter 9 Full correction Quick correction PASCAL control (prepares image correction table A) Image position correction Image position correction SALT-Dhalf control SALT-Dhalf control (prepares image correction (prepares image correction table B) table C) T-9-29 Image correction Image correction table A Table prepared by the result of table for use at time including the contents of the table A to...
Page 316: Drum Unit
Chapter 9 9.5 Drum Unit 9.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit 9.5.1.1 Outline of the Drum Unit 0000-4495 The drum unit consists of the developing assembly, photosensitive drum, auxiliary brush, and charging mechanism. As many as 4 units are used (Y, M, C, Bk), and all of them have the same construction. Primary charging roller Developing...
Page 317: Controlling The Drive Of The Drum Unit (D-Unit)
Chapter 9 9.5.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) 0000-4496 T-9-31 Parts Source of drive Remarks Developing cylinder Developing motor (M2 driven through gears through M15) Toner stirring screw Developing motor (M2 driven through gears through M15) Charging roller Linked to photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Drum ITB motor (M1)
Page 318: Developing Assembly
Chapter 9 9.5.2 Developing Assembly 9.5.2.1 Construction of the Developing Assembly 0000-4497 Outline and Uses 1. turning latent static image into visible image (development) 2. collecting residual toner from photosensitive drum - eliminates the need for a cleaning mechanism for the photosensitive drum T-9-32 Component Developing cylinder...
Page 319: Controlling The Developing Bias
9.5.2.2 Controlling the Developing Bias 0000-4498 1) AC Component fixed; used to increase the density of output images. 2) DC Component output suited to the reading of the environment sensor/SALT sensor; changes the median voltage of the AC bias to adjust the image density a-1.
Page 320 Chapter 9 a-2. Route of the Developing Cylinder Control Signal Environment SALT sensor sensor DC controller PCB J131-A J109 J131-B DEV_AC_CTRLT_Y,M DEV_CLK-A DEV_AC_CTRLT_C,K DEV_DC_CTRL_Y,M DEV_CLK-B DEV_DC_CTRL_C,K DEV_MODE_Y,M DEV_CLK-C DEV_MODE_C,K High-voltage unit HV2-SUB DEV_CLK-A DEV_CLK-B DEV_CLK-C HV1-SUB DEV_AC_CLK1_Y DEV_DC_CTRL_K DEV_AC_CLK2_Y DEV_VIN DEV_VIN DEV_VIN DEV_VIN...
Page 321: Auxiliary Brush
Chapter 9 9.5.3 Auxiliary Brush 9.5.3.1 Construction of the Auxiliary Brush 0000-4499 Outline and Uses 1. removes charges from the photosensitive drum; charges residual toner 2. controls the polarity of residual toner - thereby preventing adhesion of toner to the primary charging roller - thereby eliminating the need for a cleaning mechanism for the photosensitive drum T-9-33 Component...
Page 322: Controlling The Auxiliary Bias
Chapter 9 9.5.3.2 Controlling the Auxiliary Bias 0000-4500 T-9-34 AC Component: level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor. (upstream auxiliary brush) DC Component: level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor. (upstream/downstream auxiliary brush) b-1.
Page 323 Chapter 9 b-2. Route of the Upstream Auxiliary Brush Bias Control Signal Environment sensor DC controller PCB J131-A J131-B SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K.C SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K.C High-voltage unit HV1-SUB SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K.C SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K.C HV4(Y,M) HV4(C,Bk) HV1(Y) HV1(M) HV1(C) HV1(Bk) : control signal. F-9-27 9-31...
Page 324 Chapter 9 c-1. Route of the Downstream Auxiliary Brush Bias DC power supply unit High-voltage unit HV2-SUB HV1-SUB HV1(Y) HV1(M) HV1(C) HV1(K) DC bias for downstream auxiliary brush : +24V : -1kV F-9-28 9-32...
Page 325 Chapter 9 c-2. Route for the Downstream Auxiliary Brush Bias Control Signal Environment sensor DC controller PCB J131-A J131-B SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_Y,M SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_C,K High-voltage HV1-SUB unit SUB_LO_CTRL_Y SUB_LO_CTRL_M SUB_LO_CTRL_C SUB_LO_CTRL_K HV1(Y) HV1(M) HV1(C) HV1(Bk) : control signal. F-9-29 9-33...
Page 326: Charging Mechanism
Chapter 9 9.5.4 Charging Mechanism 9.5.4.1 Construction of the Charging Mechanism 0000-4501 Outline and Uses 1. charging the photosensitive drum 2. controlling the polarity of residual toner by the cleaning sheet T-9-35 thus preventing the adhesion of toner to the primary changing roller thus eliminating the need for a cleaning mechanism for the photosensitive drum...
Page 327: Controlling The Charging Bias
Chapter 9 9.5.4.2 Controlling the Charging Bias 0000-4502 T-9-36 level of output suited to discharge current control Component: level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor/SALT Component: sensor d-1. Route of the Primary Charging Bias DC power supply unit High-voltage unit HV2-SUB HV1-SUB...
Page 328 Chapter 9 d-2. Route for the Primary Charging Bias Control Signal Environment SALT sensor sensor DC controller PCB J131-A J109 J131-B CHRG_DC_CTRL CHRG_DC_CTRL _Y,M _C,K CH_CLK CHRG_AC_CTRL CHRG_AC_CTRL _Y,M _C,K High-voltage unit HV2-SUB CHRG_AC_CLK HV1-SUB CHRG_DC_CTRL CHRG_AC CHRG_AC CHRG_AC CHRG_AC CHRG_AC_CTRL _CLK _CLK...
Page 329: Toner Container
Chapter 9 9.6 Toner Container 9.6.1 Outline of the Toner Container 0000-4503 The toner container consists of toner, stirring blade, and toner feedscrew; as many as 4 containers are used (Y, M, C, Bk), and all of them are of the same construction. Stirring blade Toner Toner feedscrew...
Page 330: Checking The Level Of Toner
9.6.3 Checking the Level of Toner 0000-4505 The machine checks the level of toner using the following sensors: T-9-38 Developing ATR sensor assembly magnetic sensor Description checks the concentration of toner inside the developing assembly. relies on the fact that a change in the ratio between carrier (magnetic) and toner (non-magnetic) changes the force of magnetism.
Page 331: Controlling The Supply Of Toner
Chapter 9 DC controller PCB J124 J126 J125 J129 ATR_CTRL_Y,M ATR_CTRL_Y,M PATCH_P T-CRG_PULSE_Y,M,C,K ATR_SIG_Y,M ATR_SIG_Y,M PATCH_S Feedscrew rotation sensor SALT sensor sensor : control signal. F-9-35 9.6.4 Controlling the Supply of Toner 0000-4506 1. Developing Assembly If the ATR sensor identifies a shortage of toner inside the developing assembly, the machine starts control of toner supply from the toner container to the developing assembly.
Page 332: Transfer Unit
9.7 Transfer Unit 9.7.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit 9.7.1.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit 0000-4507 The transfer unit consists of 2 units: intermediate transfer unit and secondary transfer unit: Intermediate Transfer Unit intermediate transfer belt (ITB) primary transfer roller (1 pc. each for Y, M, C, and Bk) ITB cleaning blade secondary transfer internal roller Secondary Transfer Unit...
Page 333 Chapter 9 Part Source of drive Remarks Secondary transfer internal Linked to ITB roller Secondary transfer external Secondary transfer internal roller driven through gears roller Tension roller Linked to ITB Waste toner feedscrew Tension roller driven through gears DC controller PCB J105 Drum ITB motor drive signal Drum ITB...
Page 334: Controlling The Transfer Bias
Chapter 9 9.7.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias 9.7.2.1 Controlling the Transfer Bias 0000-4509 1. Primary Transfer Bias output in keeping with the reading of the environment sensor, color mode, ATVC control 2. Secondary Transfer Bias output in keeping with the type of paper, reading of the environment sensor, color mode (full-color/monochrome), ATVC control e.
Page 335 Chapter 9 f. Route of the Secondary Transfer Bias/Bias Control Signal Environment sensor DC controller PCB DC power supply unit J109 2TR_SEL 2TR_CTRL_P,N High-voltage unit HV2-SUB NCTL PCTL Secondary transfer PSEN high-voltage unit T801 : +24V DC bias for Secondary transfer : +1kV secondary transfer external roller...
Page 336: Cleaning
9.7.3 Cleaning 9.7.3.1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) 0000-4510 The machine uses a cleaning blade to clean the intermediate transfer belt (ITB). T-9-40 Cleaning belt: remains in contact with the ITB at all times, and used to scrape off toner from the ITB. Scoop-up sheet: used to prevent fall of toner.
Page 337: Secondary External Roller
Chapter 9 9.7.3.2 Secondary External Roller 0000-4511 The secondary transfer external roller is cleaned electrostatically. Description of Control A bias is applied to the secondary transfer external roller alternately using the polarity used for image formation and the polarity opposite it for longer than the time it takes the roller to make a single rotation, thereby returning the toner remaining on the roller to the ITB.
Page 338: Separation Mechanism
Chapter 9 9.7.4 Separation Mechanism 9.7.4.1 Separation 0000-4513 The machine uses the following mechanism to separate paper: T-9-41 1. Separation - Curvature (mechanical) - Static Eliminator (static electricity) It is grounded to lower the potential occurring on the back of paper, thus facilitating the separation of paper from the ITB.
Page 339 Chapter 9 The eccentric arrangement of the 2 rollers causes the paper to separate by taking advantage of the rigidity of paper (curvature separation). Paper Feed guide Attraction plate Secondary transfer external roller Feed guide Attraction plate Static eliminator F-9-43 9-47...
Page 340: Drum Itb Motor
Chapter 9 Parts Replacement 9.8.1.5 Removing Controller PCB Cover 0000-4618 Procedure 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2]. 9.8.1 Drum ITB Motor 9.8.1.1 Slide Out the Drum Unit 0000-4614 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the drum unit to the front.
Page 341 Chapter 9 9.8.1.7 Opening Main 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box. Controller Box 0000-4620 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB. F-9-50 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the F-9-47...
Page 342: Removing The Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
Chapter 9 9.8.1.8 Removing Controller Mounting 0000-4621 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB [2] together with its base. F-9-54 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2];...
Page 343: Removing The Lattice Connector Mounting
Chapter 9 9.8.1.11 Removing Developing Drive Unit 0000-4624 1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the developing motor [1], and free the harness [3] from the cable clamp [4]. F-9-58 9.8.1.12 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting 0000-4625 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect all F-9-56 connectors;...
Page 344: Removing The High-Voltage Unit
Chapter 9 9.8.1.13 Removing the High- Voltage Unit 0000-4626 1) Disconnect all connectors of the high-voltage unit; then, remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the high- voltage unit [2]. F-9-62 9.8.1.15 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting 0000-4628 F-9-60 Points to Note When Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate...
Page 345: Removing The Drum Itb Motor
Chapter 9 F-9-66 F-9-64 9.8.2 Drum Drive Unit 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 3 screws [2]; then, detach the drum ITB motor base [3]. 9.8.2.1 Slide Out the Drum Unit 0006-7762 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the drum unit to the front.
Page 346: Removing The Left Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 9 F-9-69 9.8.2.6 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000-4635 F-9-67 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 9.8.2.5 Removing 9.8.2.7 Opening Main Controller PCB Cover 0000-4634 Controller Box 0000-4636 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB cover [2].
Page 347 Chapter 9 F-9-71 F-9-74 9.8.2.8 Removing Controller Mounting 0000-4637 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB [2] together with its base. F-9-72 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box.
Page 348: Removing The Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
Chapter 9 9.8.2.9 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0000-4638 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the fixing heat discharge fan [3]. F-9-78 9.8.2.11 Removing Developing Drive Unit 0000-4640 1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the developing F-9-76 motor [1], and free the harness [3] from the cable clamp [4].
Page 349: Removing The Lattice Controller Base
Chapter 9 F-9-80 F-9-82 3) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the developing drive assembly [2]. 9.8.2.13 Removing the High- Voltage Unit 0000-4642 1) Disconnect all connectors of the high-voltage unit; then, remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the high- voltage unit [2].
Page 350: Removing The Drum Itb Motor Mounting Base
Chapter 9 F-9-84 F-9-86 9.8.2.14 Removing the Drum 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 3 ITB Motor Mounting Base 0000-4644 screws [2]; then, detach the drum ITB motor base [3]. Points to Note When Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting To remove, put your hand into the inside where you have slid out the manual feed unit;...
Page 351: Drive Roller
Chapter 9 F-9-90 9.8.3.2 Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4527 1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear, F-9-88 slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then, detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2]. 9.8.3 Drive Roller 9.8.3.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4524...
Page 352: Removing The
Chapter 9 9.8.3.3 Removing 4) Remove the 4 screws [1] at the rear, and pull out the link plate (rear) [2]. Intermediate Transfer Belt 0000-4528 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the belt cover [2]. F-9-96 5) Fit the boss [1] on the frame at the rear into the recess [A] in the middle right cover so that the unit F-9-93 is upright.
Page 353 Chapter 9 7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the marking on its surface is to the rear. link plate (front) [2]; then, rotate it 180 deg. F-9-101 2) When fitting the belt, place the unit in a low position so that the belt may be fitted from above F-9-99 and straight down.
Page 354: Removing The Drive Roller
Chapter 9 9.8.3.4 Removing the Drive Roller 0000-4529 1) The spring found at the front is under pressure; thus, starting at the front can cause the spring to snap out. Be sure to start at the rear. 2) When removing the gear, be sure to take care not to lose the parallel pin.
Page 355: Developing Motor (Bk)
Chapter 9 F-9-107 F-9-108 9.8.4 Developing Motor (Bk) 9.8.4.5 Removing Controller PCB Cover 0000-4577 9.8.4.1 Removing the Upper 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC Rear Cover 0006-7766 controller PCB cover [2]. 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 9.8.4.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0006-7773...
Page 356 Chapter 9 F-9-110 F-9-113 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box. 9.8.4.6 Opening Main Controller Box 0000-4578 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB. F-9-114 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine,...
Page 357: Developing Motor (Y/M/C)
Chapter 9 9.8.4.7 Removing 9.8.5 Developing Motor (Y/M/C) Controller Mounting 0000-4579 9.8.5.1 Removing the Upper 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove Rear Cover 0006-7767 the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB 1) Remove the upper rear cover.
Page 358 Chapter 9 9.8.5.5 Removing 9.8.5.6 Opening Main Controller PCB Cover Controller Box 0000-4569 0006-7725 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB cover [2]. controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
Page 359 Chapter 9 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box. F-9-126 F-9-124 9.8.5.8 Removing 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the Developing Motor (Y/M/C) 0000-4572 main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main and open it.
Page 360: Secondary Transfer Unit
Chapter 9 9.8.6 Secondary Transfer Unit 9.8.6.1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000-4667 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit [2]. F-9-131 When removing the secondary transfer unit, be sure to take care not to lose the tension spring [1] found behind it.
Page 361: Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 9 9.8.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit 9.8.7.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4514 1) Open the front cover, and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever to unlock it. 2) Slide out the manual feed unit. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the middle right cover [2].
Page 362: Removing The Transfer Cleaning Unit
Chapter 9 F-9-139 F-9-141 9.8.8.2 Removing the Transfer 4) Release the escape lever [1]. Cleaning Unit 0000-4647 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer cleaning unit [2]. F-9-142 9.8.9.2 Removing F-9-140 Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4521 1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear, 9.8.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1];...
Page 363 Chapter 9 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer guide plate [2]. F-9-144 F-9-147 9.8.9.3 Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt 0000-4522 4) Remove the 4 screws [1] at the rear, and pull out the 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the belt cover link plate (rear) [2].
Page 364 Chapter 9 6) Be sure that the rear link plate [1] is on the opposite of the middle right cover so that the intermediate transfer unit will not fall down. F-9-152 F-9-150 Check to make sure that the secondary transfer 7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the internal roller is free of soiling.
Page 365: Primary Transfer Roller
Chapter 9 F-9-154 F-9-156 3) Check to make sure that the edge [A] of the belt does not ride over the rib [B] of the tension roller. 4) Release the escape lever [1]. F-9-155 F-9-157 9.8.10 Primary Transfer Roller 9.8.10.2 Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4651...
Page 366 Chapter 9 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer guide plate [2]. F-9-159 F-9-162 9.8.10.3 Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt 0000-4652 4) Remove the 4 screws [1] at the rear, and pull out the 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the belt cover link plate (rear) [2].
Page 367 Chapter 9 6) Be sure that the rear link plate [1] is on the opposite of the middle right cover so that the intermediate transfer unit will not fall down. F-9-167 F-9-165 Check to make sure that the secondary transfer 7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the internal roller is free of soiling.
Page 368: Removing The Primary Transfer Roller
Chapter 9 F-9-169 3) Check to make sure that the edge [A] of the belt does not ride over the rib [B] of the tension roller. F-9-171 Points to Note When Mounting the Primary Transfer Roller F-9-170 1) Bend over the edge of the sheet [1] at the front, and fit the edge [2] of the roller and then fit its rear side.
Page 369: Secondary Transfer External Roller
Chapter 9 Take care not to touch the surface of the secondary transfer external roller. Holding the tabs [1] at both ends, remove the secondary transfer roller [2]. F-9-173 9.8.11 Secondary Transfer External Roller F-9-175 9.8.11.1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000-4661 1) If the white spacer [2] of the secondary transfer 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.
Page 370: Secondary Transfer Internal Roller
Chapter 9 cover [2]. F-9-177 F-9-179 3) Be sure that the spring [1] is securely fitted to the 4) Release the escape lever [1]. back of the tab used to remove/attach the roller. Pay attention to the orientation of the spring, as different types are used between front and rear.
Page 371 Chapter 9 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer guide plate [2]. F-9-182 F-9-185 9.8.12.3 Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt 0000-4658 4) Remove the 4 screws [1] at the rear, and pull out the 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the belt cover link plate (rear) [2].
Page 372 Chapter 9 6) Be sure that the rear link plate [1] is on the opposite of the middle right cover so that the intermediate transfer unit will not fall down. Check to make sure that the secondary transfer internal roller is free of soiling. If dirt is found, clean it with alcohol.
Page 373 Chapter 9 F-9-193 9.8.12.4 Removing Secondary Transfer Internal F-9-195 Roller 0000-4659 1) Extend the belt frame, and fit the link plate at both 4) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2] at the front and rear. front; then, remove the secondary transfer internal 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the roller [3].
Page 374: Toner Container Drive Unit
Chapter 9 F-9-199 F-9-197 9.8.13.2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-4582 9.8.13 Toner Container Drive Unit 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 9.8.13.3 Removing the Lower 9.8.13.1 Removing the Waste Rear Cover 0000-4583 Toner Container 0006-0801 1) Remove the lower rear cover. 1) Open the front cover, and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever [1] to detach the waste 9.8.13.4 Removing the Left...
Page 375: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb Cover
Chapter 9 F-9-202 9.8.13.7 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000-4587 F-9-200 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB. 9.8.13.6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000-4586 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2].
Page 376: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 9 9.8.13.8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000-4588 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB [2] together with its base. F-9-205 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box.
Page 377: Waste Toner Detection Pcb
Chapter 9 9.8.14.2 Removing the Front Cover 0000-4560 1) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 hinge pins [2]; then, detach the front cover. F-9-210 9.8.14 Waste Toner Detection PCB F-9-213 9.8.14.1 Removing the Waste 9.8.14.3 Removing Toner Container 0000-4559 Intermediate Transfer Unit 1) Open the front cover, and turn the intermediate Releasing Lever...
Page 378: Removing The Cleaner Fan Cover
Chapter 9 9.8.14.4 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover 0006-8837 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cleaner fan cover [2]. F-9-217 2) Detach the waste toner detection PCB [1] from the cover, and disconnect the connector [2] for replacement.
Page 379: Removing The Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 9 F-9-219 F-9-221 9.8.15.6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000-4607 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC F-9-220 controller PCB cover [2]. 9.8.15.2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-4603 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 9.8.15.3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000-4604...
Page 380: Opening The Main Controller Box
Chapter 9 F-9-223 F-9-226 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box. 9.8.15.7 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000-4608 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
Page 381: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 9 9.8.15.8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000-4609 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB [2] together with its base. F-9-231 9.8.15.10 Removing the Toner Container Drive Assembly...
Page 382: Tone Container Motor
Chapter 9 When mounting the top plate, check to be sure to fit the edge of the idler gear [1] after matching it against 9.8.15.11 Removing the hole [2] in the top plate and the hole [3] in the bottom plate. Feedscrew Rotation Sensor 0000-4612 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the...
Page 383: Removing The Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 9 F-9-238 9.8.16.2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-4591 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 9.8.16.3 Removing the Lower F-9-239 Rear Cover 0000-4592 9.8.16.6 Removing the DC 1) Remove the lower rear cover. Controller PCB Cover 0000-4595 9.8.16.4 Removing the Left 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2].
Page 384: Opening The Main Controller Box
Chapter 9 F-9-241 F-9-244 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box. 9.8.16.7 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000-4596 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
Page 385: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 9 9.8.16.8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000-4597 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB [2] together with its base. F-9-249 9.8.16.10 Removing the Toner Container Drive Assembly...
Page 386: Removing The Toner Container Motor
Chapter 9 When mounting the top plate, check to be sure to fit the edge of the idler gear [1] after matching it against 9.8.16.11 Removing the Toner the hole [2] in the top plate and the hole [3] in the bottom plate.
Page 387: Removing The Transfer Cleaning Unit
Chapter 9 Points to Note When Removing the Waste Toner Feedscrew Case Remove the waste toner feedscrew only when a jam has occurred and the sheet [1] attached to the feedscrew has become damaged or bent (rendered useless). F-9-256 F-9-259 1) Turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever [1] slightly counterclockwise, and remove the screw [2];...
Page 388: Removing The Upper Right Cover
Chapter 9 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the middle right cover [2]. F-9-264 9.8.18.3 Removing the Upper F-9-261 Right Cover 0000-4533 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right 4) Release the escape lever [1]. cover [2].
Page 389 Chapter 9 F-9-268 3) Connect the connector [1]; then, while pulling the escape lever [2] toward the front, hook the plate [3] on the left/right claw [4], and secure it in place with F-9-266 a screw [5] over the screw hole. Point to Note When Attaching the Pattern Reader Unit <Mounting to the Machine>...
Page 390: Removing The Upper Right Cover
Chapter 9 F-9-273 F-9-270 9.8.19.3 Removing the Upper 4) Release the escape lever [1]. Right Cover 0000-4550 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right cover [2]. F-9-271 9.8.19.2 Removing F-9-274 Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4549 1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear, 9.8.19.4 Removing the Pattern slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1];...
Page 391: Removing The Auto Registration Sensor Pcb
Chapter 9 F-9-277 3) Connect the connector [1]; then, while pulling the escape lever [2] toward the front, hook the plate [3] on the left/right claw [4], and secure it in place with F-9-275 a screw [5] over the screw hole. Point to Note When Attaching the Pattern Reader Unit <Mounting to the Machine>...
Page 392: Salt Sensor
Chapter 9 F-9-279 F-9-281 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, remove the auto registration 9.8.20 SALT Sensor sensor PCB (front) [3]. MEMO: 9.8.20.1 Pressure Release of the The auto registration sensor PCB (rear) is also Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4536 removed in the same way.
Page 393: Removing The Upper Right Cover
Chapter 9 9.8.20.3 Removing the Upper Right Cover 0000-4540 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right cover [2]. F-9-283 9.8.20.2 Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4539 1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear, F-9-286 slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1];...
Page 394 Chapter 9 Point to Note When Attaching the Pattern Reader Unit <Mounting to the Machine> 1) Match the boss [1] with the rail [2]. F-9-290 F-9-288 2) While pushing the cleaning member [1] to the right, fit it in while taking care so that it will not hit the slide rail [2] of the intermediate transfer unit on the side of the machine's side plate.
Page 395: Removing The Salt Sensor
Chapter 9 9.8.20.5 Removing the SALT Sensor 0000-4543 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the plate from the rear of the pattern reader unit [2]. F-9-293 F-9-291 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the SALT sensor [3]. F-9-292 Points to Note When Attaching the Plate When Attaching the plate [1], be sure to position it so...
Page 396 Chapter 9 9-104...
Page 397: Chapter 10 Pickup/Feeding System
Chapter 10 Pickup/ Feeding System...
Page 399 Contents Contents 10.1 Construction ..............................10-1 10.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................10-1 10.1.2 Arrangement of he Units ........................10-2 10.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers .......................... 10-3 10.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Paths ........................10-4 10.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors ......................... 10-5 10.1.6 Arrangement of the Clutches and Solenoids ..................
Page 400: Removing The Pickup Unit
Contents 10.10.1.5 Removing the Pickup Unit ......................10-37 10.10.2 Cassette Size Detection Unit ......................10-37 10.10.2.1 Removing the Cassette ......................... 10-37 10.10.2.2 Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit ................10-37 10.10.3 Pickup Roller ............................10-38 10.10.3.1 Removing the Cassette ......................... 10-38 10.10.3.2 Removing the Pickup Roller ......................
Page 401: Slide Resistor
Contents 10.10.10 Slide Resistor ............................ 10-50 10.10.10.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ....................10-50 10.10.10.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Unit ..................10-50 10.10.10.3 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Upper Cover/Lower Cover ..........10-51 10.10.10.4 Removing the Slide Resistor ..................... 10-52 10.10.11 Cassette Pickup Solenoid .........................
Page 402: Removing The Pre-Registration Motor
Contents 10.10.21.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ....................10-71 10.10.21.2 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover ..................10-71 10.10.21.3 Removing the Motor Cover ....................... 10-72 10.10.21.4 Removing the Pre-Registration Motor ..................10-72 10.10.22 Horizontal Registration Motor ......................10-72 10.10.22.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ......................10-72 10.10.22.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit .....................
Page 403: Removing The Drawer Connector (Fixing Feeder Unit)
Contents 10.10.31.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ......................10-91 10.10.31.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit ..................... 10-91 10.10.31.3 Removing the Drawer Connector (fixing feeder unit) .............. 10-92 10.10.32 Duplex Roller 1 ..........................10-92 10.10.32.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ......................10-92 10.10.32.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit ..................... 10-92 10.10.32.3 Removing the Duplex Roller 1 ....................
Page 404: Removing The Duplex Pickup Clutch
Contents 10.10.38.3 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ................10-109 10.10.38.4 Removing the Duplex Pickup Clutch ..................10-109 10.10.39 Delivery Vertical Path Unit ......................10-110 10.10.39.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ....................... 10-110 10.10.39.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ..................10-111 10.10.39.3 Removing the Upper Left Cover ..................... 10-111 10.10.39.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) ..............
Page 405: Removing The Center Delivery Tray Full Sensor
Contents 10.10.47.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ..................10-146 10.10.47.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) ..............10-146 10.10.47.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) ..............10-147 10.10.47.5 Removing the Center Delivery Tray Full sensor ..............10-149 10.10.48 Face-Down Delivery Sensor 2 ....................... 10-150 10.10.48.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover .....................
Page 406 Contents...
Page 407: Construction
Chapter 10 10.1 Construction 10.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0005-9871 The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the pickup feeder system are as follows: T-10-1 Item Description Method of paper Front loading accommodation Method of pickup Separation retard Paper feed reference Center Size of paper...
Page 408: Arrangement Of He Units
Chapter 10 10.1.2 Arrangement of he Units 0000-4672 F-10-1 T-10-2 [1] Delivery assembly [5] Pickup unit [2] Fixing unit [6] Registration unit [3] Duplex unit [7] Manual feed unit [4] Secondary transfer unit [8] Intermediate transfer unit 10-2...
Page 409: Arrangement Of Rollers
Chapter 10 10.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers 0000-4673 [23] [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [11] [12] [10] [13] [14] F-10-2 T-10-3 [1] Face-down delivery roller 1 [13] Pickup roller [2] Face-down delivery roller 2 [14] Separation roller [3] Delivery vertical path roller 1 [15] Feed roller [4] Delivery vertical path roller 2 [16] Pickup vertical path roller...
Page 410: Diagram Of The Paper Paths
Chapter 10 10.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Paths 0000-4674 Face-down delivery (center delivery tray) Face-down delivery (copy tray) Pickup from manual feeder Face-up delivery (side delivery tray) Pickup from cassette 1 Pickup from paper deck Pickup from cassette 2 Pickup from cassette 3 Pickup from cassette 4 F-10-3 10-4...
Page 411: Arrangement Of Sensors
Chapter 10 10.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors 0000-4675 [23] [25] [24] [22] [26] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [10] [15] [11] [12] [13] [14] F-10-4 T-10-4 [1] Center delivery tray full sensor (PS8) [14] Cassette 2 paper level sensor (A; PS20) [2] Face-down delivery sensor 1 (PS12) [15] Cassette 2 paper sensor (PS19) [3] Face-down delivery sensor 2 (PS6)
Page 412: Arrangement Of The Clutches And Solenoids
Chapter 10 10.1.6 Arrangement of the Clutches and Solenoids 0000-4676 F-10-5 T-10-5 [1] Delivery path switching solenoid 1 (SL2) [5] Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL3) [2] Delivery path switching solenoid 2 (SL5) [6] Duplex pickup solenoid (CL2) [3] Duplex registration clutch (CL1) [7] manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1) [4] Cassette 2 pickup solenoid (SL4) 10-6...
Page 413: Route Of Dive
Chapter 10 10.1.7 Route of Dive 0000-4677 F-10-6 T-10-6 duplex registration clutch delivery vertical path motor duplex pickup clutch face-down delivery motor drum ITB motor fixing motor cassette 1 pickup motor duplex feeder motor caste 2 pickup motor manual feed pickup solenoid registration motor caste 1 pickup solenoid pre-registration motor...
Page 414: Basic Sequence
Chapter 10 10.2 Basic Sequence 10.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On 0000-4678 Main power switch ON Printer unit WMUP WMUPR PSTBY 360 sec (approx.) Drum ITB motor (M1) Cassette 1 pickup motor (M6) Cassette 2 pickup motor (M7) Registration motor (M8) Pre-registration motor (M9)
Page 415: Detecting Jams
Chapter 10 10.3 Detecting Jams 10.3.1 Delay Jams 10.3.1.1 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly 0000-4680 The leading edge of paper is not at the sensor within a specific period of time (for feeding) after the motor has gone Start key ON or print start INTR...
Page 416: Stationary Jams
Chapter 10 T-10-8 Sensor Registration sensor (PS26) Fixing delivery sensor (PS25) Face-down delivery sensor 1 (PS12) Face-down delivery sensor 2 (PS6) Duplex registration sensor (PS21) Duplex pickup sensor (PS24) 10.3.2 Stationary Jams 10.3.2.1 Stationary Jams 0000-4682 A stationary jam will be identified if the sensor N does not go OFF within a specific period of tie after the sensor N has gone ON.
Page 417: Stationary Jams At Power-On
Chapter 10 10.3.2.2 Stationary Jams at Power-On 0000-4683 The machine checks the absence of paper over the following sensors before it starts initial multiple rotations at power-on: T-10-10 Sensor Caste 1 retry paper sensor (PS16) Cassette 2 retry paper sensor (PS17) Registration sensor (PS26) Fixing delivery sensor (PS25) Face-down delivery sensor 1 (PS12)
Page 418: Cassette
Chapter 10 10.4 Cassette 10.4.1 Identifying the Paper Size 0000-4684 The machine identifies the size of paper into the cassette with reference to the slide guide (15 settings) of the cassette. The 4-in-a-row actuator designed for the identification of the cassette size found on the machine side goes ON/OFF according to the position of the slide guide, permitting the machine to identify 15 settings.
Page 419 Chapter 10 4-in-a-row actuator Rear Front Paper size Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 11X17*1 A5 R A4 R B5 R 12X18*2 no cassette ON: actuator pressed (i.e... '0'in reference to a check in I/O mode). *1:279 x 431.8[mm] *2:305 x 457[mm] 10-13...
Page 420: Detecting The Level Of Paper
Chapter 10 10.4.2 Detecting the Level of Paper 0000-4685 The level of paper inside the cassette is detected using the following three sensors: F-10-13 T-10-12 [1] Flag [6] Paper level sensor flag [2] Cassette paper sensor [7] Lifter gear [3] Gear [8] Tray [4] Cassette paper level sensor (A) [9] Paper...
Page 421 Chapter 10 View from the Front of the Machine If the cassette is full of paper Cassette paper Cassette paper level sensor (B) level sensor (A) Paper If the cassette is half full of paper Paper Cassette paper Cassette paper level sensor (B) level sensor (A) OFF ON...
Page 422: Cassette Pick-Up Unit
Chapter 10 10.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit 10.5.1 Outline 0005-9837 The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate, and the pickup roller is borught down to the paper for pickup. The feed roller and the srpaton roller are used to make sure that no more than a single sheet of paper is moved to the feeing assembly;...
Page 423: Basci Sequence Of Operations
Chapter 10 10.5.2 Basci Sequence of Operations 0005-9838 Print start PRINT LSTR 2.76sec (approx.) 1.3sec (approx.) Cassette pickup solenoid (SL3) Cassette 1 pickup motor (M6) Cassette retry paper sensor (PS16) Registration sensor (PS26) Pre-registration sensor (M9) Registration motor (M8) F-10-16 10-17...
Page 424: Manual Feed Pickup Unit
Chapter 10 10.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit 10.6.1 Outline 0000-4688 The paper in the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the pickup feeder roller as the lifter moves up, an a single sheet of paper is separed and moved ahead by the work of the pickup feeder roller and the separation roller. F-10-17 T-10-15 [1] Paper tray...
Page 425: Basic Sequence Of Operations
Chapter 10 Manual feeder Torque limter pickup feed roller Torque delay mehcainsm DC drive direct link Separation roller Manual feeder holder separation roller F-10-18 Torque delay mechanism Torque limiter in Initial operation condition in operation Manual feed feeder roller Paper Tortion spring Damper core Spring pin...
Page 426: Identifying The Size Of Paper
Chapter 10 10.6.3 Identifying the Size of Paper 0000-4690 The machine checks the widht of paper in reference to the level of output ffrom the variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movemetn of the side guide epatle. The side guide plate on the manual feed tray is set by the user when he/she deposit paper.
Page 427: Detecting The Presence/Absence Of Paper
Chapter 10 10.6.4 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper 0000-4691 When paper is placed, its weight pushes down the paper detecting flag, thus enabling the manual feed paper sensor (PS10) to detect the presence of paper. Paper detecting Paper flag Manual feed paper sensor (PS10) Paper Manual feed paper...
Page 428: Detecting The Last Paper
Chapter 10 10.6.5 Detecting the Last paper 0000-4692 When the last paper pickup roll rotates, the slit in the roll cuses the output of the last paper sensor (PS9) to beocme wave-form pusles. The last paper roll rotates only when the last paper is picked up; otherwise, it remains still. The machine will identify the paper to be the last paper if it detects 4 or more output pules form the lat paper sensor.
Page 429: Registration Unit
Chapter 10 10.7 Registration Unit 10.7.1 Outline 0000-4693 The upper registraont roller an the lower registration roller are dreiven by the registration motor (M8), and are used to make user aht the paper an the image on the intermediate transfer rbelt mach at a specific position. The upper guide locking arm latches in place when the unit is fitted to the machine.
Page 430 Chapter 10 Registration motor (M8) Pre-registration motor (M9) Manual feed pickup solenoid Manual feed control gear Upper Lower Pre-registration Duplex Manual feed registration registration roller roller shaft roller shaft roller roller F-10-25 10-24...
Page 431: Duplex Feeding Unit
Chapter 10 10.8 Duplex Feeding Unit 10.8.1 Outline 0000-4694 The duplex nit is drivn by the duplex motor (M26), and is sued when making double-sided prints. [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] F-10-26 T-10-16 [1] Reversing sheet [9] Delivery cooling duct [2] Reversing rollre [10] Arching assembly [3] Reversing sheet...
Page 432: Controling Horizontal Registration
Chapter 10 10.8.2 Controling Horizontal Registration 0000-4695 When in duplexing mode, the machine executes horizontal registration detection for paper coming from the duplex feed assembly to see if there is any discrepancy in main scanning direction (front-rear direction), thus adjusting the point of laser exposure.
Page 433: Face-Down Delivery, A4, 5 Sheets In Circulation
Chapter 10 10.8.3 Face-Down Delivery, A4, 5 Sheets in Circulation 0000-4696 The number on a white backgoudn and the nbuer on a black background indicated the 1s side and the 2nd side, respse3ctively. point of reversal duplex pre-registration check on horizontal registration in wait for re-pickup...
Page 434 Chapter 10 (10) thereafter, repeats (7) through (10) (11) (12) 10-28...
Page 435: Face-Down Delivery, A3, 3 Sheets In Cirucilation
Chapter 10 (14) (13) 10.8.4 Face-Down Delivery, A3, 3 Sheets in Cirucilation 0000-4697 The nbuemr on a white background and the nbuemr on a black backgrdoun indicated the 1st side and he 2nd side, respectively. point of reversal duplex pre-registration 10-29...
Page 436 Chapter 10 check on horizontal registration point of reversal non-contact reversal in wait for re-pickup thereafter, repeats (6) through (8) 10-30...
Page 437 Chapter 10 (10) 10-31...
Page 438: Delivery
Chapter 10 10.9 Delivery 10.9.1 Delivery 0000-4698 The machine uses any of the following 3 types of delivery (paper apths): face-deown delivery (center delivery tray) face-down delivery (copy tray) face-up device r(side delivery tray) Face-down delivery (center delivery tray) Face-down delivery (copy tray) Face-up delivery (side delivery tray)
Page 439: Movement In The Direction Of Face-Down Delivery
Chapter 10 10.9.2 Movement in the Direction of Face-Down Delivery 0000-4699 After moving thtough the fixing unit, the paper moves along the FU/FD switching flapper now facing downawar; it then pushes down the plastic sheet to move to the vertical path diecoint for face-down delivery. Plastic sheet FU/FD switching...
Page 440: Movement In The Direction Of Face-Up Delivery
Chapter 10 10.9.3 Movement in the Direction of Face-Up Delivery 0000-4700 After moving through he fixing unit, the paper moves uder the FU/FD swtichign flapper, which has been shfited up by the delivery path switching solenoid (SL2); at this time the cross path flapper is also siwtched over by the work of the delivery path switching solenoid 2 (SL5), thus guding the paper into the direction of face-up delivery.
Page 441: Moement For Copy Tray Dievyer
Chapter 10 10.9.5 Moement for Copy Tray Dievyer 0000-4702 The paper meos while pushign down the plastic sheet, and then moves ahead in the direction of the centra tray. Immeiately after the trailig edge of the paper moves past the palstc film the momevement stops, at which time the movmeent rverses so that the paper moves along the plastic sheet in the direction of the copy tray.
Page 442: Cassette Pickup Unit
Chapter 10 10.10 Parts Replacement cover [2]. Procedure 10.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit 10.10.1.1 Removing Cassette 0000-4704 MEMO: The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be removed in the same way. F-10-34 1) Slide out the cassette. 10.10.1.4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000-4707 10.10.1.2 Removing the Front...
Page 443: Cassette Size Detection Unit
Chapter 10 10.10.1.5 Removing the Pickup Unit 0000-4708 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3]. F-10-37 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and push the protrusion [A] from the left to release the lock; F-10-36 then, detach the cassette size detection unit [2] for the machine's front.
Page 444: Pickup Roller
Chapter 10 10.10.3 Pickup Roller 10.10.4.2 Removing Feeding Roller 0000-4714 10.10.3.1 Removing 1) Put your hand through the machine's front; then, pick the tab [A] of the feed roller, and pull it out. Cassette 0000-4710 MEMO: The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be removed in the same way.
Page 445: Removing The Left Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 10 10.10.5.2 Removing Separation Roller 0000-4717 1) Put your hand through the front of the machine; then, pick the tab [A] of the separation roller [1], and pull it out. F-10-42 10.10.6.5 Removing Controller Box Cover 0000-4760 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power F-10-41 distribution PCB, and free the harness from the wire saddle [2];...
Page 446 Chapter 10 F-10-46 F-10-44 10.10.6.8 Removing Developing Drive Unit 0000-4764 1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the developing motor [1], and free the harness [3] from the cable When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover clamp [4]. When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable.
Page 447 Chapter 10 3) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the developing drive assembly [2]. F-10-51 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate F-10-49 [2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3]. 10.10.6.9 Removing the Lattice Controller Base 0000-4765 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect all connectors;...
Page 448 Chapter 10 F-10-53 F-10-55 10.10.6.12 Removing the Rear 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 Right Cover screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup motor 0000-4768 unit [3]. The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover; shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
Page 449: Cassette Retry Paper Sensor
Chapter 10 10.10.7.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 0000-4734 The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover; shift it to the direction indicated to detach. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the rear right cover [2]. F-10-57 10.10.7 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor 10.10.7.1...
Page 450 Chapter 10 10.10.7.5 Removing the Pickup Unit 0000-4736 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3]. F-10-63 10.10.7.7 Removing F-10-61 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor 0000-4738 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the 10.10.7.6 Removing the Pick- cassette retry paper sensor [2].
Page 451: Cassette Paper Sensor
Chapter 10 10.10.8 Cassette Paper Sensor 10.10.8.1 Removing Cassette 0000-4740 MEMO: The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be removed in the same way. F-10-65 1) Slide out the cassette. 2) Fit the 6 locations [A] indicated in the figure firmly into the holes of the mounting plate;...
Page 452 Chapter 10 F-10-71 F-10-69 10.10.8.6 Removing the Pick- 10.10.8.4 Removing the Pickup up System Sensor Mounting Vertical Path Cover Plate 0000-4743 0000-4745 1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical 1) Remove the 2 screws [1] at the rear, and remove the path lower cover [1];...
Page 453 Chapter 10 F-10-75 2) Fit the 6 locations [A] indicated in the figure firmly into the holes of the mounting plate; then, secure F-10-73 the sensor mounting plate [2] in place. 10.10.8.7 Removing Cassette Paper Sensor 0000-4746 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the cassette paper sensor [2].
Page 454 Chapter 10 10.10.9 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) 10.10.9.1 Removing Cassette 0000-4748 MEMO: The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be removed in the same way. 1) Slide out the cassette. F-10-79 10.10.9.2 Removing the Front 10.10.9.4 Removing the Pickup Right Cover Vertical Path Cover 0000-4749...
Page 455 Chapter 10 F-10-81 F-10-83 10.10.9.6 Removing the Pick- up System Sensor Mounting 10.10.9.7 Removing Plate 0000-4753 Cassette Paper Level Sensor 1) Remove the 2 screws [1] at the rear, and remove the (A/B) 0000-4754 bracket [2]. 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the cassette paper sensor (A/B) [2].
Page 456 Chapter 10 1) Attach the bushing [1] to the frame; then, attach the 10.10.10 Slide Resistor gear shaft [2]. 10.10.10.1 Removing Manual Feed Unit 0000-4995 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right side to slide out the manual feed unit [2]. F-10-85 2) Fit the 6 locations [A] indicated in the figure firmly into the holes of the mounting plate;...
Page 457 Chapter 10 F-10-92 F-10-90 2) Disconnect the connector [1] at the rear; then, while MEMO: opening the face plate [2], shift the manual feed tray When attaching the upper cover [1] and the lower [3] 90 deg or more to detach it upward. cover [2], match the markings [A] found on the side, and slide them into place.
Page 458: Cassette Pickup Solenoid
Chapter 10 10.10.10.4 Removing the Slide 10.10.11 Cassette Pickup Solenoid Resistor 0000-4998 10.10.11.1 Removing Cassette 0000-4771 Points to Note Removing the Slide Resistor When detaching the slide resistor, do not apply excess MEMO: force when spreading the claw of the lower cover; The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be otherwise, the claw can break.
Page 459 Chapter 10 F-10-99 F-10-97 10.10.11.6 Removing 10.10.11.4 Removing Cassette Pickup Solenoid 0000-4776 Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000-4774 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup 1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical solenoid [3].
Page 460 Chapter 10 10.10.12.2 Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit 0000-4950 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the base [2]. F-10-101 2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed unit cover [4].
Page 461 Chapter 10 F-10-106 F-10-108 2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2]; 2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2]; then, detach the manual feed unit [3]. then, detach the manual feed unit [3]. F-10-107 F-10-109 10.10.14 Manual Feed Roller 10.10.14.2 Removing...
Page 462 Chapter 10 2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed unit cover [4]. F-10-113 2) Remove the gear [1] at the front, and detach the F-10-111 bushing [2]. (For both gear and the bushing, free the claw fitted in the groove of the roller for detachment.) F-10-112...
Page 463 Chapter 10 10.10.15 Manual Feed Separation Roller When attaching the manual feed roller, be sure that the groove of the parallel pin is toward the rear. 10.10.15.1 Removing Manual Feed Unit 0000-4964 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].
Page 464 Chapter 10 10.10.15.3 Removing Motor Cover 0006-8853 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the motor cover [2] at the rear. F-10-120 2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed unit cover [4].
Page 465 Chapter 10 When attaching the bushing and the gear at the front, check to be sure that the claw is hooked on the groove of the roller. F-10-125 3) Remove the bushing [1] at the rear. F-10-128 10.10.15.5 Removing Manual Feed Separation F-10-126...
Page 466 Chapter 10 When attaching the face plate, be sure that the spring [2] fits into the hole [1] found on the front side of the arm. F-10-132 10.10.16 Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor F-10-130 10.10.16.1 Removing Manual Feed Unit 0000-5000 2) Detach the rear guide [1] and the middle guide [2].
Page 467 Chapter 10 F-10-134 10.10.16.2 Removing F-10-136 Manual Feed Tray Unit 0000-5001 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the base [2]. 10.10.16.3 Removing Manual Feed Tray Upper Cover/Lower Cover 0000-5002 1) Spread the side guide [1] of the manual feed tray unit, and separate it into the upper cover [2] and the lower cover [3] (for detachment).
Page 468 Chapter 10 10.10.17 Manual Feed Sensor 10.10.17.1 Removing Manual Feed Unit 0000-4970 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right side to slide out the manual feed unit [2]. F-10-138 10.10.16.4 Removing Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor 0000-5003 1) Free the needle spring [1] from the hook, and detach the detecting roll [2].
Page 469 Chapter 10 10.10.17.3 Removing Manual Feed Roller 0000-4973 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the mounting plate [2]. F-10-143 2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed unit cover [4].
Page 470 Chapter 10 F-10-148 4) Remove the resin clamp [1], and pull out the F-10-150 manual feed roller [2]. 10.10.17.4 Removing Motor Cover 0000-4974 When attaching the manual feed roller, be sure that the 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the motor cover groove of the parallel pin is toward the rear.
Page 471 Chapter 10 F-10-152 F-10-154 3) Remove the sensor flag [2] attached to the middle guide [1]. When attaching the face plate, be sure that the spring [2] fits into the hole [1] found on the front side of the arm. F-10-155 4) Disconnect the connector [1] from behind the middle guide, and detach the manual feed paper...
Page 472 Chapter 10 10.10.18 Transparency Sensor (Front/Rear) 10.10.18.1 Removing Manual Feed Unit 0000-4952 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right side to slide out the manual feed unit [2]. F-10-159 10.10.18.3 Removing Transparency Sensor (front/ rear) 0000-4954 1) While taking care not to touch the light-emitting face, detach the transparency sensor [1].
Page 473 Chapter 10 2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed unit cover [4]. F-10-161 2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2]; then, detach the manual feed unit [3]. F-10-164 F-10-162 F-10-165...
Page 474 Chapter 10 When attaching the manual feed roller, be sure that the groove of the parallel pin is toward the rear. F-10-166 2) Remove the gear [1] at the front, and detach the bushing [2]. F-10-169 (For both gear and the bushing, free the claw fitted in the groove of the roller for detachment.) When attaching the bushing and the gear at the front, check to be sure that the claw is hooked on the groove...
Page 475 Chapter 10 F-10-173 F-10-171 10.10.20 Registration Motor 10.10.19.5 Removing Manual Feed Pickup 10.10.20.1 Removing Solenoid 0000-4981 Manual Feed Unit 0000-4989 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right [2]; then, detach the manual feed pickup solenoid side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].
Page 476 Chapter 10 10.10.20.2 Removing Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000-4990 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right side to slide out the manual feed unit [2]. F-10-178 10.10.20.3 Removing Motor Cover 0000-4992 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the motor cover F-10-176 [2] at the rear.
Page 477 Chapter 10 F-10-182 F-10-180 10.10.21.2 Removing 10.10.21 Pre-Registration Motor Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000-4984 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right 10.10.21.1 Removing side to slide out the manual feed unit [2]. Manual Feed Unit 0000-4983 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].
Page 478 Chapter 10 F-10-185 F-10-187 10.10.21.3 Removing 10.10.22 Horizontal Registration Motor Cover 0000-4986 Motor 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the motor cover [2] at the rear. 10.10.22.1 Removing Fixing Unit 0000-4882 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit [2].
Page 479 Chapter 10 F-10-191 1) Stand it so that the fixing feeder unit cover is at the F-10-189 bottom. 2) Free the 6 snap-ons [A] and the 3 hooks [B]; then, 10.10.22.3 Removing detach the sheet [1] from behind the fixing feeder Duplex Open/Close Guide 0000-4884 assembly.
Page 480: Registration Sensor
Chapter 10 F-10-195 F-10-193 10.10.23 Registration Sensor 10.10.23.1 Removing - When attaching the horizontal registration motor Manual Feed Unit support plate [1], be sure to bring the horizontal 0000-4956 registration motor support plate firmly in contact 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right with the grounding lead spring [2] found under the side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].
Page 481 Chapter 10 F-10-197 F-10-199 10.10.23.2 Removing 10.10.24 Fixing/Feeder Unit Transparency Sensor Mounting Plate 0000-4957 10.10.24.1 Removing 1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the 2 Fixing Unit 0006-7407 screws [2]; then, detach the sensor base [3] found at 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. the bottom.
Page 482 Chapter 10 10.10.25.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 0000-4720 The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover; shift it to the direction indicated to detach. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the rear right cover [2]. F-10-201 10.10.25 Vertical Path Roller 10.10.25.1...
Page 483 Chapter 10 10.10.25.5 Removing Pickup Unit 0000-4722 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3]. F-10-207 10.10.25.7 Mounting the Pick- F-10-205 up System Sensor Mounting Plate 0000-4725 10.10.25.6 Removing the Pick- up System Sensor Mounting Plate 0000-4723...
Page 484 Chapter 10 2) Free the claw [A] of the bushing [1] at the front; shift the vertical path roller [2] to the rear and then pull it upward to detach. F-10-209 3) Attach the gear [1] and the E-ring [2]. F-10-212 10.10.26 Inside Delivery Roller 10.10.26.1...
Page 485 Chapter 10 F-10-216 F-10-214 10.10.27.2 Removing 3) Free the internal delivery roller [1] from the cut-off Center Delivery Tray 0000-4786 of the frame at the front; then, detach it. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center delivery tray [2]. F-10-215 10.10.27 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/ F-10-217...
Page 486 Chapter 10 [2]. F-10-218 F-10-220 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery internal cover [2]. Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching, engage the left/right hook [1] found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the plate on the side of the machine, and secure it with screws.
Page 487 Chapter 10 Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the screws [2]; then, detach the delivery path unit [3]. version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later. Be (The delivery path unit will no longer be used.) sure to check its version in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>D-CON.
Page 488 Chapter 10 F-10-226 F-10-228 7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be 9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path used.) unit [3] in place; then, connect the 3 connectors. At this time, check to make sure that the machine positioner [4] is properly in place.
Page 489 Chapter 10 F-10-230 F-10-232 11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2]; then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and 1) Disconnect the connector [1] and the 4 terminals put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial [2], and remove the screw [1];...
Page 490 Chapter 10 10.10.27.6 Removing Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/ Closed Sensor 0000-4789 1) Remove the fixing/feeder open/closed sensor [1]. F-10-235 10.10.28.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 0000-4728 F-10-234 10.10.28 Pickup Vertical Path Cover The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover; shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
Page 491 Chapter 10 F-10-237 F-10-239 10.10.28.5 Removing 2) Remove the spring [1], and detach the sensor flag [2]. Pickup Unit 0000-4730 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3]. F-10-240 3) Remove the pickup vertical path cover open/closed F-10-238 sensor [1].
Page 492 Chapter 10 10.10.29 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/ 10.10.29.3 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit Closed Detecting Switch (Old) 0000-4795 10.10.29.1 Removing Upper Left Cover 0000-4793 In case following models, refer to "Removing the 1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)".
Page 493 Chapter 10 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later. Be sure to check its version in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>D-CON. 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then, remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the upper left cover [3].
Page 494 Chapter 10 Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the delivery path unit [3]. (The delivery path unit will no longer be used.) F-10-252 7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be used.) F-10-250 5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the slip-stop...
Page 495 Chapter 10 F-10-256 11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2]; then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial position. F-10-254 9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path unit [3] in place;...
Page 496 Chapter 10 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing/ feeder open/closed sensor [2]. F-10-258 1) Disconnect the connector [1] and the 4 terminals [2], and remove the screw [1]; then, detach the fixing/feeder unit open/closed sensor mounting plate [4].
Page 497 Chapter 10 10.10.31 Drawer Connector (fixing/ feeder unit) 10.10.31.1 Removing Fixing Unit 0000-5005 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit [2]. F-10-262 10.10.30.2 Removing Disconnecting the Drawer Connector (manual feed unit) 0000-8485 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the drawer connector [2].
Page 498 Chapter 10 10.10.31.3 Removing Drawer Connector (fixing feeder unit) 0000-5007 1) Free the harness [2] from the cable clamp [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [3], and remove the 2 screws [4]; then, detach the connector base [5]. F-10-269 10.10.32.2 Removing Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-8926...
Page 499 Chapter 10 F-10-271 F-10-273 2) Remove the duct. 5) Remove the gear [1] and the bearing [2] at the rear. When removing the gear, pay attention not to lose the parallel pin found at the rear. 3) Remove the 2 E-rings [1], gear [2], and link [3]; then, remove the screw [4] to detach the grounding wire [5].
Page 500: Fixing Unit
Chapter 10 7) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the delivery path Points to Note When Attaching the Duplex Roller switching solenoid 2 [3] together with the base. 1) Be sure that the longer side [A] of the D-cut in the roller shaft [1] is toward the front.
Page 501 Chapter 10 [2]. F-10-283 F-10-281 2) Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit [1], and 10.10.33.2 Removing remove the screw [1], then detach the duct [2]. Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-4904 1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/ feeder unit [2].
Page 502 Chapter 10 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and shift the duplex 10.10.34 Duplex Registration Sensor feeder motor [2] in the direction indicated to detach. 10.10.34.1 Removing Fixing Unit 0000-8478 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit [2].
Page 503 Chapter 10 - When placing the fixing feeder unit upright, be sure to use paper to prevent dirt from collecting. - If you forgot to use paper, make a double-sided test copy before ending the work. F-10-290 F-10-292 1) Stand it so that the fixing feeder unit cover is at the bottom.
Page 504 Chapter 10 10.10.35.2 Removing detach the sheet [1] from behind the fixing feeder assembly. Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-4891 1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/ feeder unit [2]. F-10-296 10.10.35.4 Removing Horizontal Registration F-10-294 Motor Support Plate 0000-4893 10.10.35.3 Removing 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2...
Page 505 Chapter 10 sensor flag moves smoothly. F-10-300 F-10-298 After replacement, check to make sure that the sensor flag moves smoothly. 10.10.35.5 Removing Duplex Registration Sensor 0000-4894 10.10.36 Duplex Pickup Sensor 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the duplex horizontal registration sensor [2]. 10.10.36.1 Removing Cleaner Fan Cover...
Page 506 Chapter 10 10.10.36.5 Removing Manual Feed Unit 0000-4920 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right side to slide out the manual feed unit [2]. F-10-302 10.10.36.3 Removing Inside Cover (lower) 0000-4917 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 F-10-304 screws [2];...
Page 507 Chapter 10 F-10-308 F-10-306 10.10.36.9 Removing 10.10.36.7 Removing the Rear Pickup Unit 0000-4924 Right Cover 0000-4922 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3]. The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover; shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
Page 508 Chapter 10 F-10-310 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate [2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3]. F-10-312 10.10.36.14 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000-4930 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2].
Page 509: Opening The Main Controller Box
Chapter 10 F-10-314 F-10-317 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box. 10.10.36.15 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000-4931 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
Page 510: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 10 10.10.36.16 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000-4932 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB [2] together with its base. F-10-322 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main controller base [2].
Page 511: Removing The Lattice Connector Mounting
Chapter 10 10.10.36.19 Removing Lattice Connector Mounting 0000-4935 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect all connectors; then, detach the lattice connector Mounting [2]. F-10-327 10.10.36.22 Removing Duplex Pickup Sensor 0000-4937 1) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the rear side plate F-10-325 side, and detach the rail support plate [2] of the manual feed unit.
Page 512 Chapter 10 5) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the sensor support plate [3]. F-10-332 F-10-329 6) Remove the duplex pickup sensor [1]. 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector support plate [2]. F-10-333 10.10.37 Duplex Registration Clutch F-10-330...
Page 513 Chapter 10 F-10-334 F-10-336 10.10.37.2 Removing 10.10.37.4 Removing Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-4877 Duplex Open/Close Guide 0000-4879 1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/ 1) Remove the duplex open/close guide [1]. feeder unit [2]. F-10-337 10.10.37.5 Removing F-10-335 Duplex Registration Clutch 0000-4880 10.10.37.3 Removing...
Page 514 Chapter 10 2) Slide the bushing [1] to free the duplex feed roller 3 [2]. F-10-341 F-10-339 4) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the duplex registration clutch [2]. When attaching it, fit it while turning the duplex feed roller 3 [2] so as not to bend the sheet [1] of the duplex guide plate.
Page 515 Chapter 10 F-10-343 F-10-345 10.10.38.2 Removing 10.10.38.4 Removing Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-4898 Duplex Pickup Clutch 0000-4901 1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/ 1) Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit [1]. feeder unit [2]. F-10-346 2) Remove the 2 E-rings [1]. F-10-344 10.10.38.3 Removing...
Page 516 Chapter 10 3) Shift the bushing [1] to the inside of the duplex feeder guide. When attaching, be sure that the stop [A] of the clutch is at the bottommost. F-10-351 F-10-348 4) Disconnect the connector [1] of the duplex pickup Make sure that the front side of the roller shaft is in clutch.
Page 517 Chapter 10 F-10-353 F-10-355 10.10.39.2 Removing Center Delivery Tray 0000-4801 10.10.39.4 Removing 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center Delivery Vertical Path Unit delivery tray [2]. (Old) 0000-4802 In case following models, refer to "Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)". - flom MLW01838 - flom MLX02392 1) Detach the strap [1] from the delivery vertical...
Page 518 Chapter 10 F-10-357 F-10-359 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path unit [3]. 10.10.39.5 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) 0006-4883 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later.
Page 519 Chapter 10 inside cover [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical used.) path cover [3] from the machine. F-10-361 F-10-363 6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2]; then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3]. To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front.
Page 520 Chapter 10 F-10-365 8) Fit the top [1] of the new delivery vertical path inside of the machine plate [2]. F-10-367 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit, be sure to lift it once before setting it in place. 10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to the machine;...
Page 521 Chapter 10 F-10-369 F-10-371 10.10.40 Face-Down Delivery Roller 10.10.40.3 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit 10.10.40.1 Removing (Old) 0000-4823 Upper Left Cover 0000-4821 1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left In case following models, refer to "Removing the cover [3].
Page 522 Chapter 10 F-10-373 F-10-375 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path unit [3]. 10.10.40.4 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) 0006-8958 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later.
Page 523 Chapter 10 inside cover [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical used.) path cover [3] from the machine. F-10-377 F-10-379 6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2]; then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3]. To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front.
Page 524 Chapter 10 F-10-381 8) Fit the top [1] of the new delivery vertical path inside of the machine plate [2]. F-10-383 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit, be sure to lift it once before setting it in place. 10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to the machine;...
Page 525 Chapter 10 F-10-385 F-10-387 10.10.40.5 Removing Delivery Sensor Mounting MEMO: Plate The edge of the sensor flag is cut to an I-shape, 0006-0709 permitting it to be removed upward. 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the sensor mounting plate [2]. F-10-388 Points to Note When Attaching the Sensor Flag When attaching the sensor flag, be sure to match the...
Page 526 Chapter 10 Spring When attaching, shape the grounding leaf plate 10.10.40.7 Removing the Face- removed in 3) into a half-loop, and work so that the frame plate [1] and the grounding leaf spring [2] are in Down Delivery Roller 1 0000-4826 contact.
Page 527 Chapter 10 feeder unit [2]. F-10-396 10.10.41.3 Removing F-10-394 Inside Delivery Roller 0000-4844 1) Open the fixing feeder unit cover. 10.10.41.2 Removing Fixing/Feeder Unit Cover 0000-4843 1) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, grounding wire [2], and E-ring [3]; then, release the link [4]. F-10-397 2) Remove the E-ring[1] and the bushing [2] at the front;...
Page 528 Chapter 10 3) Free the internal delivery roller [1] from the cut-off of the frame at the front; then, detach it. The spring [1] hooked on the flapper of the upper guide is small and can easily be lost. Detach it in advance.
Page 529 Chapter 10 F-10-404 F-10-406 10.10.42 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 When detaching the gear [3], be sure to pay attention so as not to lose the parallel pin found at the rear. 10.10.42.1 Removing Remove the 3 E-rings [1], gear [2], bushing [4], and Upper Left Cover 0000-4846 gear mounting plate [5] at the rear.
Page 530 Chapter 10 F-10-410 F-10-408 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4 10.10.42.3 Removing screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path Delivery Vertical Path Unit unit [3]. (Old) 0000-4848 In case following models, refer to "Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)".
Page 531 Chapter 10 inside cover [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path cover [3] from the machine. F-10-412 F-10-414 10.10.42.4 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) 0006-8959 To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front. Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the screws [2];...
Page 532 Chapter 10 5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the slip-stop [2] from the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then, detach the strap [3] from the delivery inside cover. (The delivery vertical path cover will no longer be used.) F-10-418 8) Fit the top [1] of the new delivery vertical path inside of the machine plate [2].
Page 533 Chapter 10 F-10-422 10.10.42.5 Removing the Face- Down Delivery Sensor 2 0000-4849 1) Free the harness [2] from the wire saddle [1], disconnect the 2 connectors [3], and remove the 2 screws [4]; then, detach the face-down delivery motor mounting plate [5]. F-10-420 10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to the machine;...
Page 534 Chapter 10 Points to Note When Attaching the Sensor Flag When attaching the sensor flag [1], hook one end of the inside spring [2] and hook the other end on the flag. F-10-427 10.10.43 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 2 F-10-425 10.10.43.1 Removing Upper Left Cover...
Page 535 Chapter 10 F-10-431 F-10-429 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4 10.10.43.3 Removing screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path Delivery Vertical Path Unit unit [3]. (Old) 0000-4854 In case following models, refer to "Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)".
Page 536 Chapter 10 inside cover [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path cover [3] from the machine. F-10-433 F-10-435 10.10.43.4 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) 0006-8960 To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front. Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the screws [2];...
Page 537 Chapter 10 F-10-439 8) Fit the top [1] of the new delivery vertical path F-10-437 inside of the machine plate [2]. 6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2]; When mounting the delivery vertical path unit, be sure then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3].
Page 538 Chapter 10 F-10-443 10.10.43.5 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Roller 0000-4855 1) Disconnect the connector [1[, and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path motor [3] together with the mounting plate. F-10-441 10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to the machine;...
Page 539 Chapter 10 3) Remove the gear [1] and detach the belt [2] at the rear; then, remove the bushing [3], and detach the delivery vertical roller 2 [4]. F-10-448 10.10.44.3 Removing F-10-446 Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) 0000-4835 10.10.44 Face-Down Delivery Motor 10.10.44.1 Removing In case following models, refer to "Removing the...
Page 540 Chapter 10 F-10-450 F-10-452 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path unit [3]. 10.10.44.4 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) 0006-8961 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later.
Page 541 Chapter 10 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery (The delivery vertical path cover will no longer be inside cover [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical used.) path cover [3] from the machine. F-10-454 F-10-456 6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2];...
Page 542 Chapter 10 F-10-458 8) Fit the top [1] of the new delivery vertical path inside of the machine plate [2]. F-10-460 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit, be sure to lift it once before setting it in place. 10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to the machine;...
Page 543 Chapter 10 F-10-462 10.10.44.5 Removing the Face- F-10-464 Down Delivery Motor 0000-4836 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 10.10.45.2 Removing screws [2]; then, detach the face-down delivery Center Delivery Tray 0000-4858 motor [3]. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center delivery tray [2].
Page 544 Chapter 10 1) Detach the strap [1] from the delivery vertical cover; then, detach the delivery vertical path cover [2]. F-10-468 F-10-466 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery internal cover [2]. Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching, engage the left/right hook [1] found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the...
Page 545 Chapter 10 Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the screws [2]; then, detach the delivery path unit [3]. version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later. Be (The delivery path unit will no longer be used.) sure to check its version in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>D-CON.
Page 546 Chapter 10 F-10-474 F-10-476 7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be 9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path used.) unit [3] in place; then, connect the 3 connectors. At this time, check to make sure that the machine positioner [4] is properly in place.
Page 547 Chapter 10 10.10.46 Face-Down Delivery Sensor 1 10.10.46.1 Removing Upper Left Cover 0000-4810 1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left cover [3]. F-10-478 11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2]; then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial position.
Page 548 Chapter 10 10.10.46.3 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) 0000-4812 In case following models, refer to "Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)". - flom MLW01838 - flom MLX02392 1) Detach the strap [1] from the delivery vertical cover; then, detach the delivery vertical path cover [2].
Page 549 Chapter 10 Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the screws [2]; then, detach the delivery path unit [3]. version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later. Be (The delivery path unit will no longer be used.) sure to check its version in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>D-CON.
Page 550 Chapter 10 F-10-491 F-10-493 7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be 9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path used.) unit [3] in place; then, connect the 3 connectors. At this time, check to make sure that the machine positioner [4] is properly in place.
Page 551 Chapter 10 F-10-495 F-10-498 11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2]; then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial MEMO: position. The edge of the sensor flag is cut to an I-shape, permitting it to be removed upward.
Page 552 Chapter 10 10.10.47.3 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit 10.10.47 Center Delivery Tray Full (Old) 0000-4864 sensor 10.10.47.1 Removing In case following models, refer to "Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)". Upper Left Cover 0000-4862 - flom MLW01838 1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and - flom MLX02392 remove the 2 screws [2];...
Page 553 Chapter 10 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later. Be sure to check its version in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>D-CON. 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then, remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the upper left cover [3].
Page 554 Chapter 10 Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the delivery path unit [3]. (The delivery path unit will no longer be used.) F-10-511 7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be used.) F-10-509 5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the slip-stop...
Page 555 Chapter 10 F-10-515 11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2]; then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial position. F-10-513 9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path unit [3] in place;...
Page 556 Chapter 10 10.10.48 Face-Down Delivery 10.10.48.3 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit Sensor 2 (Old) 0000-4818 10.10.48.1 Removing Upper Left Cover 0000-4816 In case following models, refer to "Removing the 1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)". remove the 2 screws [2];...
Page 557 Chapter 10 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later. Be sure to check its version in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>D-CON. 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then, remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the upper left cover [3].
Page 558 Chapter 10 Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the delivery path unit [3]. (The delivery path unit will no longer be used.) F-10-528 7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be used.) F-10-526 5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the slip-stop...
Page 559 Chapter 10 F-10-532 11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2]; then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial position. F-10-530 9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path unit [3] in place;...
Page 560 Chapter 10 2) Remove the sensor flag [1], and detach the face- remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left down delivery sensor 2 [2]. cover [3]. F-10-535 F-10-537 10.10.49.2 Removing Points to Note When Attaching the Sensor Flag Center Delivery Tray 0000-4805 When attaching the sensor flag [1], hook one end of...
Page 561 Chapter 10 1) Detach the strap [1] from the delivery vertical cover; then, detach the delivery vertical path cover [2]. F-10-541 F-10-539 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery internal cover [2]. Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching, engage the left/right hook [1] found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the...
Page 562 Chapter 10 10.10.49.4 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit (New) 0006-8967 and then pull it out toward the front. Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the screws [2];...
Page 563 Chapter 10 6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2]; then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3]. F-10-549 F-10-547 9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path unit [3] in place;...
Page 564 Chapter 10 10.10.50 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 10.10.50.1 Removing Upper Left Cover 0000-4867 1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left cover [3]. F-10-551 11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2]; then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial position.
Page 565 Chapter 10 10.10.50.3 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) 0000-4869 In case following models, refer to "Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)". - flom MLW01838 - flom MLX02392 1) Detach the strap [1] from the delivery vertical cover; then, detach the delivery vertical path cover [2].
Page 566 Chapter 10 10.10.50.4 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit (New) 0006-8966 and then pull it out toward the front. Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the screws [2];...
Page 567 Chapter 10 6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2]; then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3]. F-10-566 F-10-564 9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path unit [3] in place;...
Page 568 Chapter 10 10.10.50.6 Removing Cleaner Fan 0006-2819 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the 3 claws; then, detach the cleaner fan [2]. F-10-568 11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2]; then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial position.
Page 569: Drive Belt
Chapter 10 10.10.51 Delivery Path Switching 10.10.52 Face-Down Delivery Roller Solenoid 2 1 Drive Belt 10.10.51.1 Removing 10.10.52.1 Removing Delivery Path Switching Upper Left Cover 0000-4828 Solenoid 2 0000-4874 1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left 1) Open the fixing/feeder unit cover.
Page 570 Chapter 10 10.10.52.3 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) 0000-4830 In case following models, refer to "Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)". - flom MLW01838 - flom MLX02392 1) Detach the strap [1] from the delivery vertical cover; then, detach the delivery vertical path cover [2].
Page 571 Chapter 10 10.10.52.4 Removing Delivery Vertical Path Unit To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit (New) 0006-8968 and then pull it out toward the front. Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the screws [2];...
Page 572 Chapter 10 6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2]; then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3]. F-10-587 F-10-585 9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path unit [3] in place;...
Page 573 Chapter 10 F-10-589 11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2]; then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial F-10-591 position. F-10-590 10.10.52.5 Removing the Face- Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt 0000-4831 1) Free the protrusion [1] of the belt pulley (upper or...
Page 574 Chapter 10 10-168...
Page 575 Chapter 11 Fixing System...
Page 577 Contents Contents 11.1 Construction ..............................11-1 11.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................11-1 11.1.2 Major Components ..........................11-1 11.1.3 Construction of the Control System ....................... 11-3 11.2 Basic Sequence .............................. 11-4 11.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On ....................11-4 11.2.2 Sequence of Operations (printing;...
Page 578 Contents 11.5.4.6 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ..................... 11-29 11.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor ........................11-30 11.5.5.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ......................11-30 11.5.5.2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide .................... 11-30 11.5.5.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ....................11-31 11.5.5.4 Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor ..................11-32 11.5.5.5 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit .....................
Page 579 Contents 11.5.14.2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide ..................11-61 11.5.14.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ..................... 11-62 11.5.14.4 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor ..................11-63 11.5.14.5 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ................... 11-63 11.5.15 Fixing Motor ............................11-64 11.5.15.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................11-64 11.5.15.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ....................
Page 581: Construction
Chapter 11 11.1 Construction 11.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0005-9875 The major functions of the fixing system are as follows: T-11-1 Item Description Fixing method Heat roller Fixing heater 2 fixing rollers (main heater, sub heater) 1 pressure roller (heat retaining heater) Control temperature 190 deg C (in PSTBY) Fixing drive control...
Page 582 Chapter 11 Component Notation Description Heat retaining heater 100/120/230V:80W (no temperature control) Main thermistor Non-contact type (temperature control/overheating detection) Sub thermistor Temperature control, overheating detection Thermal switch 222 -/+8 deg C (operating temperature) Separation claw Non-contact type (facilitates paper separation in high-humidity environment) Fixing inlet sensor PS27 Detection of passage of paper to fixing unit)
Page 583: Construction Of The Control System
Chapter 11 11.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0000-5013 The major components of the fixing system are arranged as follows: Fuse PCB DC controller PCB J51_14 H3_ON J105A_1 J108A-5 J51_2 H1_ON J105A_14 J108A-2 J51_1 H2_ON J105A_13 J105-6 to 9 Heater driver Fixing motor thermistor (TH2)
Page 584: Basic Sequence
Chapter 11 11.2 Basic Sequence 11.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On 0000-5014 Starts here if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 90˚C or more when Main power the main power switch is turned on. switch ON WMUP WMUPR PSTBY Here, alternately ON for 3 sec and OFF for 1.5 sec...
Page 585: Sequence Of Operations (Printing; Plain Paper, For Less Than 180 Sec)
Chapter 11 11.2.2 Sequence of Operations (printing; plain paper, for less than 180 sec) 0000-5015 Start key ON PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Fixing motor to 193˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C to 164˚C (M24) Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2)
Page 586: Basic Sequence Of Operations (During Printing; Plain Paper, For 180 Sec Or More)
Chapter 11 11.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations (during printing; plain paper, for 180 sec or more) 0000-5016 Start key ON PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY Fixing motor Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Idle rotation to 164˚C to 193˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C (M24) Fixing main heater (H1)
Page 587: Outline
Chapter 11 11.3 Various Control Mechanisms 11.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller 11.3.1.1 Outline 0000-5017 The fixing roller is driven by a pulse motor used exclusively for it; The roller is controlled for the following: 1) speed to suit the type of medium used 2) speed to suit the (large) quantity of printing work 3) configuration to prevent partial deformation otherwise caused by a long period of no use *PM-FUSER-B...
Page 588: Outline
Chapter 11 11.3.1.3 Controlling the Speed According to the Quantity of Printing 0000-5019 If left unattended, the heat of the pressure roller would be absorbed by paper when a large quality of printing is under way, causing the paper to curl appreciably upon delivery and, thus, making proper stacking difficult.To prevent excess curling, the speed of the roller is reduced to half (as set in service mode) when as many as 100 large-size sheets or as many as 200 small-size sheets have been handled.
Page 589 Chapter 11 Fuse PCB DC controller PCB H3_ON J51_14 J105A_1 H1_ON J51_2 J105A_14 H2_ON J51_1 J105A_13 Heater drive PCB Sub thermistor (TH2) Main thermistor (TH1) (non-contact) Thermal switch (TP1) Sub heater (H2) Main heater (H1) Heat retaining heater (H3) F-11-8 11-9...
Page 590: At Power-On
Chapter 11 11.3.2.2 At Power-On 0000-5022 The fixing roller is heated by 2 fixing heaters (main heater H1, sub heater H2). The main heater repeats remaining ON for 3.5 sec and OFF for 1.5 sec until the fixing temperature reaches 190 deg C. The sub heater, on the other hand, remains ON throughout.
Page 591: During Printing
Chapter 11 WMUPR PSTBY Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Fixing heat retain- ing heater (H3) Fixing motor (M24) 300 sec 480 sec *1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control (to 190˚C) according to the reading of the main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
Page 592: Between Sheets
Chapter 11 If a print job exceeds 180 sec, the fixing roller is rotated for 30 sec after the job (so that the heat of the fixing roller is transmitted evenly to the pressure roller). Start key ON PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY...
Page 593: Overheating In Areas Without Paper
Chapter 11 Start key ON PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY Fixing motor (M24) Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Fixing main to 174˚C to 193˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C to 164˚C to 164˚C to 174˚C to 185˚C to 164˚C heater (H1) Fixing sub...
Page 594: Detecting The Passage Of Paper
Chapter 11 11.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper 11.3.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper 0000-5028 The mechanisms involved in the detection of the passage of paper in the fixing unit are as follows: 1. Fixing Inlet Sensor Detects passage of paper being moved into the fixing unit. 2.
Page 595: Protective Functions
Chapter 11 11.4 Protective Functions 11.4.1 Turning Off the Power Against Overheating (in response to activation of thermal switch) 0006-0741 Once its contact has opened, the thermal switch will not return to its initial state even after the error temperature has been corrected.
Page 596: Detecting Overheating By The Thermistors
Chapter 11 11.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Thermistors 0000-5029 When the sub thermistor mounted at the end of the fixing roller detects 239 deg C, the signal from the DC controller turns off the heater drive circuit, thus cutting off power to the main heater and the sub heater. DC controller J108 J105...
Page 597: Fixing Unit
Chapter 11 11.5 Parts Replacement Procedure 11.5.1 Fixing Unit 11.5.1.1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000-5031 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit [2]. F-11-18 2) Fit the fixing unit in the machine, and execute the following service mode to measure the nip: COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK 1.5mm...
Page 598: Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 F-11-21 11.5.2.2 Removing Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5042 1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3 snap-on claws) F-11-20 Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto measurement. F-11-22 11.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame 2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
Page 599: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector [2]. F-11-24 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-27 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3]. 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ thermal switch).
Page 600: After Disassembling The Fixing Unit
Chapter 11 5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.2.4 After Disassembling upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. the Fixing Unit 0000-5044 If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows: 1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that...
Page 601: Fixing Roller
Chapter 11 MEMO: 11.5.3 Fixing Roller A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0.4 mm. 11.5.3.1 Removing the Fixing A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the Unit 0000-5052 nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the rear by 0.2 mm.
Page 602: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 11.5.3.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000-5054 1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the grounding wire. (AC heater line) F-11-38 3) Remove the rear cover [1]. (2 snap-on claws) F-11-41 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector [2].
Page 603: Remove The Fixing Main Heater And The Fixing Sub Heater
Chapter 11 F-11-43 F-11-46 4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1]. 7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1]. F-11-44 5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing F-11-47 upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2].
Page 604: Removing The Fixing Roller
Chapter 11 11.5.3.5 Removing the Fixing Roller 0000-5057 1) Remove the separation claw [1]. F-11-48 2) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the end of the heater at the front. F-11-51 Points to Note When Attaching hte Separation Claw When attaching the separation claw, be sure that it is mounted as indicated.
Page 605: After Disassembling The Fixing Unit
Chapter 11 1.5mm Standard: 8.75mm±0.25mm Paper (less than movement Standard: Center 5000 sheets) |a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm (5000 sheets or more) 1.5mm F-11-55 3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear: 4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on F-11-53 the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
Page 606: Pressure Roller
Chapter 11 F-11-57 11.5.4.2 Removing Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5067 1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3 snap-on claws) F-11-56 Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto measurement. F-11-58 11.5.4 Pressure Roller 2) Remove the insulating cover [1]. 11.5.4.1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000-5066...
Page 607: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector [2]. F-11-60 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-63 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3]. 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ thermal switch).
Page 608: Removing The Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater
Chapter 11 5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Temperature Retainer Heater 0000-5069 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and pull out the 2 fastons [2]. F-11-66 6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
Page 609: Removing The Pressure Roller
Chapter 11 11.5.4.6 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit 0000-5071 If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows: 1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that the length of the pressure spring is 31.5mm.
Page 610: Fixing Main Thermistor
Chapter 11 MEMO: 11.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0.4 mm. 11.5.5.1 Removing the Fixing A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the Unit 0000-5073 nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the rear by 0.2 mm.
Page 611: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 11.5.5.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000-5075 1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the grounding wire. (AC heater line) F-11-79 3) Remove the rear cover [1]. (2 snap-on claws) F-11-82 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector [2].
Page 612: Removing The Fixing Main Thermistor
Chapter 11 F-11-84 F-11-87 4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1]. 7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1]. F-11-85 5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing F-11-88 upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2].
Page 613: After Disassembling The Fixing Unit
Chapter 11 F-11-90 F-11-89 2) Fit the fixing unit in the machine, and execute the following service mode to measure the nip: COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK Points to Note When Attaching hte Main Thermistor 1.5mm Standard: When attaching, be sure so that the retaining spring 8.75mm±0.25mm Paper (less than...
Page 614: Fixing Sub Thermistor
Chapter 11 F-11-93 11.5.6.2 Removing Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5080 1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3 snap-on claws) F-11-92 Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto measurement. F-11-94 11.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
Page 615: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector [2]. F-11-96 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-99 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3]. 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ thermal switch).
Page 616: Removing The Fixing Sub Thermistor
Chapter 11 5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.6.4 Removing the Fixing upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Sub thermistor 0000-5082 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing sub thermistor [2]. F-11-102 6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
Page 617: Fixing Thermal Switch
Chapter 11 2) Fit the fixing unit in the machine, and execute the following service mode to measure the nip: COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK 1.5mm Standard: 8.75mm±0.25mm Paper (less than movement 5000 sheets) Standard: Center |a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm (5000 sheets or more)
Page 618: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 F-11-109 F-11-112 11.5.7.2 Removing 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the Delivery Upper Guide 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3]. 0000-5086 1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3 snap-on claws) F-11-113 F-11-110...
Page 619 Chapter 11 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. connector [2]. F-11-118 F-11-115 6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
Page 620: Removing The Fixing Thermal Switch
Chapter 11 11.5.7.4 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch 0000-5088 1) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the upper frame, and detach the fixing thermal switch [2]. F-11-122 - Check the thermal switch for improper installation 1) After attaching the thermal switch to the fixing F-11-121 assembly, use the scale to measure the intervals (A/ B) between the leaf spring and the fixing assembly...
Page 621: After Disassembling The Fixing Unit
Chapter 11 11.5.7.5 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the rear by 0.2 mm. the Fixing Unit 0000-5089 If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to If the median value of the measured nip is toward the secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the higher limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be...
Page 622: Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater
Chapter 11 11.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater 11.5.8.1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000-5046 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit [2]. F-11-129 3) Remove the rear cover [1]. (2 snap-on claws) F-11-127 11.5.8.2 Removing...
Page 623: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 11.5.8.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000-5048 1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the grounding wire. (AC heater line) F-11-134 4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1]. F-11-132 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector [2].
Page 624: Remove The Fixing Main Heater And The Fixing Sub Heater
Chapter 11 F-11-139 F-11-137 2) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the end of the heater at the front. 7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1]. F-11-140 F-11-138 3) Pull out the fixing main heater [1] and the fixing 11.5.8.4 Remove the Fixing sub heater [2].
Page 625: After Disassembling The Fixing Unit
Chapter 11 11.5.8.5 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the rear by 0.2 mm. the Fixing Unit 0000-5050 If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to If the median value of the measured nip is toward the secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the higher limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be...
Page 626: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit 3) Remove the rear cover [1]. (2 snap-on claws) [2]. F-11-148 F-11-145 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the 11.5.9.2 Removing 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
Page 627 Chapter 11 F-11-150 F-11-153 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector [2]. 5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. F-11-151 F-11-154 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ thermal switch).
Page 628: Removing The Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater
Chapter 11 7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1]. F-11-158 3) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and detach the F-11-156 heater retaining plate [2]. 11.5.9.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater 0000-5063 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and pull out the 2...
Page 629: After Disassembling The Fixing Unit
Chapter 11 11.5.9.5 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the rear by 0.2 mm. the Fixing Unit 0000-5064 If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to If the median value of the measured nip is toward the secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the higher limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be...
Page 630: Fixing Inlet Guide
Chapter 11 11.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide 1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that the length of the pressure spring is 31.5mm. 11.5.10.1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000-5037 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit [2].
Page 631: Delivery Upper Guide
Chapter 11 If the median value of the measured nip is toward the higher limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the side with a higher nip value at the edge. If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance is correct, the adjusting screw both at the front and rear may be given a 1/2 turn so that the nip may change by about 0.3 mm.
Page 632: Delivery Lower Guide
Chapter 11 F-11-174 F-11-172 11.5.12.2 Removing 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the Delivery Upper Guide 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3]. 0000-5104 1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3 snap-on claws) F-11-173 F-11-175...
Page 633: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector [2]. F-11-177 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-180 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3]. 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ thermal switch).
Page 634: Removing The Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater
Chapter 11 5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.12.4 Removing the Fixing upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Temperature Retainer Heater 0000-5106 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and pull out the 2 fastons [2]. F-11-183 6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
Page 635: Remove The Delivery Lower Guide
Chapter 11 11.5.12.6 Remove the Delivery Lower Guide 0000-5108 1) Remove the mounting screw [1] of the static eliminator. F-11-188 4) Remove the fixing heat retaining heater [1]. F-11-191 2) Remove the fixing pin [1] of the delivery lower guide. F-11-189 11.5.12.5 Removing...
Page 636: After Disassembling The Fixing Unit
Chapter 11 Guide When mounting, be sure to set the spring [1] on either end of the delivery lower guide as indicated. F-11-193 F-11-196 F-11-194 F-11-197 4) Remove the delivery lower guide [1] from the front/ rear side plate. 11.5.12.7 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit 0000-5109 If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to...
Page 637: Fixing Inlet Sensor
Chapter 11 about 0.3 mm. F-11-198 2) Fit the fixing unit in the machine, and execute the following service mode to measure the nip: COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK F-11-200 1.5mm Standard: 8.75mm±0.25mm Paper (less than movement Standard: Center 5000 sheets) |a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm (5000 sheets...
Page 638: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 F-11-201 F-11-204 11.5.13.2 Removing 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the Delivery Upper Guide 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3]. 0000-5092 1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3 snap-on claws) F-11-205 F-11-202...
Page 639 Chapter 11 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. connector [2]. F-11-210 F-11-207 6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
Page 640: Removing The Fixing Inlet Sensor
Chapter 11 11.5.13.4 Removing the Fixing 1.5mm Inlet Sensor 0000-5094 Standard: 8.75mm±0.25mm Paper (less than movement 1) Disconnect the connector [1] from the lower frame Standard: Center 5000 sheets) |a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm (5000 sheets side, and detach the fixing inlet sensor [2].
Page 641: Fixing Delivery Sensor
Chapter 11 F-11-217 11.5.14.2 Removing Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5098 1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3 snap-on claws) F-11-216 Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto measurement. F-11-218 11.5.14 Fixing Delivery Sensor 2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
Page 642: Removing The Fixing Upper Frame
Chapter 11 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector [2]. F-11-220 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-223 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3]. 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ thermal switch).
Page 643: Removing The Fixing Delivery Sensor
Chapter 11 5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.14.4 Removing the Fixing upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Delivery Sensor 0000-5100 1) Detach the fixing delivery sensor [1] form the lower frame side. F-11-226 F-11-229 6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing...
Page 644: Fixing Motor
Chapter 11 1.5mm Standard: 8.75mm±0.25mm Paper (less than movement Standard: Center 5000 sheets) |a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm (5000 sheets or more) 1.5mm F-11-231 3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear: 4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
Page 645: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb Cover
Chapter 11 11.5.15.4 Removing Controller Box Cover 0006-2289 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off distribution PCB, and free the harness from the will not come into contact with the latch of the flat wire saddle [2];...
Page 646: Removing The High-Voltage Unit
Chapter 11 F-11-237 F-11-240 11.5.15.7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0006-2305 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the fixing heat discharge fan [3]. F-11-238 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box.
Page 647: Removing The Left Lower Rear Cover
Chapter 11 F-11-242 F-11-244 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate [2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3]. 2) Remove the mounting screw [1] of the high-voltage cable, and free the high-voltage cable [2] from the cable clamp [3];...
Page 648: Fixing Drive Unit
Chapter 11 11.5.15.11 Removing Fixing Drive Unit 0006-2311 1) Slide out the fixing feeder assembly. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2]; then, detach the fixing drive unit [3]. F-11-246 4) Remove the secondary transfer high-voltage unit together with the delivery cooling fan.
Page 649 Chapter 11 11.5.15.12 Removing Fixing Motor 0006-2312 When mounting the fixing motor to the motor base, be sure that the connector [2] of the motor [1] is located as shown. F-11-249 Remove the tension spring [1] and the 3 screws [2] found inside the fixing drive assembly;...
Page 650 Chapter 11 11-70...
Page 651 Chapter 12 Externals and Controls...
Page 653: Parts Replacement Procedure
Contents Contents 12.1 Control Panel ..............................12-1 12.1.1 Outline ..............................12-1 12.1.2 LCD Processing ............................12-1 12.1.3 LCD Contras Adjustment ........................12-1 12.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU ...................... 12-2 12.2 Counters ................................. 12-3 12.2.1 Outline ..............................12-3 12.2.2 Signal-Sided Print and 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print ..............12-5 12.2.3 Side of a Duplex Print (duplex model only) ...................
Page 654: Removing The Developing Drive Unit
Contents 12.5.2.10 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ..................12-21 12.5.3 High-Voltage Unit ..........................12-22 12.5.3.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................12-22 12.5.3.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ....................12-22 12.5.3.3 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ....................12-22 12.5.4 Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ....................12-23 12.5.4.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................
Page 655 Contents 12.5.12.3 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting ................12-32 12.5.12.4 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB ....................12-33 12.5.13 Relay PCB 1 ............................12-33 12.5.13.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................12-33 12.5.13.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ....................12-33 12.5.13.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ..................12-33 12.5.13.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ...................
Page 656 Contents 12.5.20.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ....................12-44 12.5.20.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ..................12-44 12.5.20.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................... 12-44 12.5.20.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ..................12-45 12.5.20.6 Opening the Main Controller Box ....................12-45 12.5.20.7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ..................
Page 657 Contents 12.5.25.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ................... 12-58 12.5.25.6 Opening the Main Controller Box ....................12-59 12.5.25.7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .................. 12-60 12.5.26 Power Supply Cooing Fan ........................12-60 12.5.26.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................12-60 12.5.26.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ....................
Page 658 Contents...
Page 659: Control Panel
Chapter 12 12.1 Control Panel 12.1.1 Outline 0000-5110 The machine's control panel consists of PCBs, LCD, and touch panel as shown below; the control panel is associated with the following functions: - LCD indication - contrast adjustment - touch switch input - hard key input Main controller PCB (sub) J1304A,J1304B...
Page 660: Functions Of The Control Panel Cpu
Chapter 12 12.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU 0000-5113 - Monitoring key inputs (relays the inputs made by keypad keys and function keys to the CPU on the main controller PCB) - Controlling the buzzer sound - Turning on/off thecontrolpanel LEDs 12-2...
Page 661: Counters
Chapter 12 12.2 Counters 12.2.1 Outline 0000-5114 The machine is equipped with counters that keep track of the number of prints made according to the type of print; a specific counter reading is shown in response to a press on the Check key on the control panel.The particulars of the counter settings made at time of shipment from factory and grouped by model are as follows: T-12-1 Model...
Page 662 Chapter 12 Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 240V Total 1 total (full total (full color total (black- total (black- scan (total 1) (*5) color + + mono color; and-white; and-white; mono small) large) small) color;...
Page 663: Signal-Sided Print And 2Nd Side Of A Double-Sided Print
Chapter 12 T-12-2 Guide to Notation: large: large-size paper (in excess of 364 mm in feed length; increment by 1) small: small-size paper (364 mm or less in feed direction) total: all copies (C + P); increment by 1 duplex: auto duplex copy; increment by 1 3 digits in Counter column: settings in following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>COUNTER1 through 6 (for details, see description in Service Mode)
Page 664: Fans
Chapter 12 12.3 Fans 12.3.1 Outline 0000-5118 The names and functions of the fans used inside the machine are as follows: T-12-5 Notation Name Description machine cooling fan cools the drum cartridge and the developing motor fixing heat exhaust fan discharges the heat generated by the fixing assembly to the outside of the machine power supply cooling fan...
Page 665: Sequence Of Operations (Fan)
Chapter 12 12.3.2 Sequence of Operations (fan) 0000-5119 The following is the sequence of operations used by the machine to drive the fans: When the control panel power switch is pressed to start sleep mode, the control panel LCD goes OFF. If the reading of the environment sensor is 30 deg C or higher at this timing, the machine rotates the fixing heat discharge fan, power supply cooling fan, and cleaner cooling fan for 30 min continuously and, thereafter, moves into sleep mode.
Page 666: Power Supply
Chapter 12 12.4 Power Supply 12.4.1 Power Supply 12.4.1.1 Timing of Power Supply 0005-9431 The reader unit is supplied with 24 VDC by the printer unit at the following timing of operation: Standby Sleep mode Main power switch turned ON Power plug connected Power save mode to outlet...
Page 667: Route Of Power Supply
Chapter 12 For heater DADF-K1 (If a pedestal is Inlet installed, connect it Reader C1 to its outlet.) Finisher- M1/N1/N2 PS Print Server Unit-C1 Side Paper Printer Deck-P1 Inlet Outlet1 Cable for Outlet2 deck heater Outlet3 Inlet Pedestal If a pedestal is installed, connect the pedestal power cable to its outlet 2.
Page 668: Power Supply Route Lnside The Printer Unit
Chapter 12 Interface PCB 15 VDC Reader controller 5 VDC generation 24 VDC 3.3 VDC generation 12 VDC 2.5 VDC generation generation 15 VDC generation 5 VDC To DF 24 VDC generation 12 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC From printer unit 100/230 VAC 24 VDC 100/230 VAC...
Page 669: Rated Output Of Dc Power Supply Pcb
Chapter 12 Power supply unit Leakage breaker Main Heater power control PCB switch 3.3V DCP1 PCB Main 3.3VAN controller PDL board 12VAN PCB (main) DCP2 PCB Control Main 3.3V panel unit controller 3.3VAN Power PCB (sub) distribution Coin 3.3VAN manager or 12VAN Card reader 3.3V...
Page 670: Protection Function
Chapter 12 12.4.3 Protection Function 12.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms 0006-0766 The machine's power supply PCB and the power supply PCBs of its accessories are equipped with an overcurrent/ voltage protective mechanisms that prevent damage to the power supply circuit by automatically cutting off the output voltage in the event of an overcurrent/voltage caused, for example, by a short-circuit in any of its loads.
Page 671: Energy-Saving Function
Chapter 12 12.4.5 Energy-Saving Function 12.4.5.1 Outline 0006-0772 1. Standby Mode In standby mode, the machine is in operation or is ready to operate, with all its parts supplied with power. 2. Power-Save Mode The term "power-save mode" is used generically to refer to the following modes, in which the machine is supplied with power differently than it is in normal mode: power-save, low-power, sleep.
Page 672 Chapter 12 Description: In sleep mode 1 (relatively higher power consumption), the fixing assembly is totally deprived of power. The DC controller PCB, however, remains supplied with power. In sleep mode 2 (relatively lower power consumption), on the other hand, the printer unit (including the fixing assembly) remains OFF;...
Page 673: Fixing Drive Unit
Chapter 12 12.5 Parts Replacement 12.5.1.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000-5130 Procedure 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2]. 12.5.1 Fixing Drive Unit 12.5.1.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-5127 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 12.5.1.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000-5128...
Page 674: Removing The Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
Chapter 12 F-12-14 F-12-11 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the 2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, and open it. F-12-12 F-12-15 12.5.1.7 Removing the Fixing...
Page 675: Removing The High-Voltage Unit
Chapter 12 F-12-16 F-12-18 12.5.1.8 Removing the High- 12.5.1.9 Removing the Left Voltage Unit Lower Rear cover 0000-5134 0000-5135 1) Disconnect all connectors of the high-voltage unit; 1) Removing the left lower rear cover. then, remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the high- voltage unit [2].
Page 676: Removing The Fixing Drive Unit
Chapter 12 F-12-20 F-12-22 3) Pull the secondary transfer high-voltage unit [1] 12.5.1.11 Removing the Fixing slightly to the front, and free the high-voltage cable Drive Unit 0000-5137 [3] from the cable clamp [2]. 1) Slide out the fixing feeder assembly. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2];...
Page 677: Removing The Lower Rear Cover
Chapter 12 12.5.2.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000-5147 1) Remove the lower rear cover. 12.5.2.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000-5150 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 12.5.2.4 Removing Controller Box Cover 0000-5148 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power F-12-25 distribution PCB, and free the harness from the wire saddle [2];...
Page 678: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 12 F-12-30 F-12-27 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the 2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, and open it. F-12-28 F-12-31 12.5.2.7 Removing the DC...
Page 679: Removing The Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
Chapter 12 F-12-32 F-12-34 12.5.2.8 Removing the Fixing 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the Heat Discharge Fan 0000-5153 connector [2]; then, detach the heat exhaust fan unit 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the [3]. connector [2];...
Page 680: High-Voltage Unit
Chapter 12 12.5.3 High-Voltage Unit 12.5.3.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-5138 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 12.5.3.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000-5139 1) Remove the lower rear cover. 12.5.3.3 Removing the High- F-12-36 Voltage Unit 0000-5140 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main 1) Disconnect all connectors of the high-voltage unit;...
Page 681: Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit
Chapter 12 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate [2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3]. F-12-40 12.5.4 Secondary Transfer High- F-12-42 Voltage Unit 12.5.4.4 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover 0000-5144 12.5.4.1 Removing the Upper 1) Removing the left lower rear cover.
Page 682: Dc Power Supply Unit
Chapter 12 2) Remove the mounting screw [1] of the high-voltage cable, and free the high-voltage cable [2] from the cable clamp [3]; then, detach it from the edge saddle [4] of the high-voltage unit base. F-12-46 12.5.5 DC Power Supply Unit F-12-44 12.5.5.1 Removing the Upper 3) Pull the secondary transfer high-voltage unit [1]...
Page 683: Control Panel
Chapter 12 12.5.6 Control Panel control panel [2]. 12.5.6.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover (small) 0000-5171 1) Remove the upper left cover (small). 12.5.6.2 Removing the Inside Cover 0000-5172 1) Open the front cover and the drum unit cover. 2) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside F-12-50 cover [2].
Page 684: Removing The Control Panel Back Plate
Chapter 12 F-12-52 F-12-54 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the 12.5.7.5 Removing the Control control panel [2]. Panel LCD Unit 0000-5191 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the control panel LCD unit [2]. F-12-53 12.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate 0000-5190 1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] from the CPU...
Page 685: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb Cover
Chapter 12 12.5.8.3 Removing Controller Box Cover 0000-5281 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off distribution PCB, and free the harness from the will not come into contact with the latch of the flat wire saddle [2];...
Page 686: When Replacing The Dc Controller Pcb
Chapter 12 12.5.8.6 When Replacing the 12.5.9.3 Removing the Left DC Controller PCB Upper Rear Cover 0000-5284 0000-5319 1) After replacing the DC controller PCB, use the 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. following service mode to initialize the memory of 12.5.9.4 the DC controller PCB: Removing...
Page 687: Opening The Main Controller Box
Chapter 12 F-12-63 F-12-61 2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable.
Page 688: Removing The Counter Memory Pcb
Chapter 12 F-12-66 F-12-68 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, 12.5.10 Fuse PCB and open it. 12.5.10.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-5322 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 12.5.10.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000-5323...
Page 689 Chapter 12 12.5.10.4 Removing the Fuse 0000-5325 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and free the 5 card spacers [2]; then, detach the fuse PCB [3]. F-12-71 12.5.11.4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Mounting 0000-5301 F-12-70 1) Remove the 5 screws [1], and remove the power supply cooling fan mointing plate[2];...
Page 690: Duplex Driver Pcb
Chapter 12 F-12-76 F-12-73 12.5.12 Duplex Driver PCB 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the protective plate [1]. 12.5.12.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-5311 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 12.5.12.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000-5312 1) Remove the lower rear cover.
Page 691: Relay Pcb 1
Chapter 12 12.5.12.4 Removing Duplex Driver PCB 0000-5314 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the duplex driver PCB [2]. F-12-79 F-12-78 12.5.13.5 Removing the DC 12.5.13 Relay PCB 1 Controller PCB Cover 0000-5306 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC 12.5.13.1 Removing the Upper controller PCB cover [2].
Page 692: Opening The Main Controller Box
Chapter 12 F-12-81 F-12-84 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box. 12.5.13.6 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000-5308 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
Page 693: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 12 12.5.13.7 Removing the DC 12.5.14.2 Removing the Inside Controller Mounting Cover 0000-5309 0000-5180 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free 1) Open the front cover and the drum unit cover. all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove 2) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2].
Page 694: Control Panel Key Switch Pcb
Chapter 12 12.5.15.2 Removing the Inside Cover 0000-5175 1) Open the front cover and the drum unit cover. 2) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside cover [2]. F-12-91 12.5.14.4 Removing Control Panel CPU PCB 0000-5182 1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the 2 flat cables [2];...
Page 695: Control Panel Inverter Pcb
Chapter 12 F-12-95 F-12-97 12.5.15.4 Removing 12.5.16 Control Panel Inverter PCB Control Panel Back Plate 0000-5177 1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] from the CPU PCB, remove the 2 flat cables [2], disconnect the 2 12.5.16.1 Removing the Upper connectors [3] from the inverter PCB, remove the Left Cover (small) 0000-5183 binding screw [4], and remove the 8 self-tapping...
Page 696: Environment Sensor
Chapter 12 F-12-99 F-12-101 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the 12.5.16.5 Removing control panel [2]. Control Panel Inverter PCB 0000-5186 1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the control panel inverter PCB [3].
Page 697 Chapter 12 2) Slide out the manual feed unit. 12.5.17.3 Removing 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the middle right Environment Sensor 0000-5344 cover [2]. 1) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the upper right stay of the machine, and remove the screw [1]; then, detach the environment sensor mounting plate [2].
Page 698: Removing The Lower Rear Cover
Chapter 12 12.5.18.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000-5228 1) Remove the lower rear cover. 12.5.18.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000-5231 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 12.5.18.4 Removing Controller Box Cover 0000-5229 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power F-12-109 distribution PCB, and free the harness from the wire saddle [2];...
Page 699: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 12 F-12-114 F-12-111 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the 2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, and open it. F-12-112 F-12-115 12.5.18.7 Removing the DC...
Page 700: Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor
Chapter 12 F-12-118 F-12-116 12.5.19 Front Cover Open/Closed 12.5.18.8 Removing Sensor Registration Unit Open/ Closed Sensor Mounting 0000-5234 12.5.19.1 Removing 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the Tonner Container release screw [2]; then, detach the registration unit open/ Lever 0006-2360 closed sensor mounting [3].
Page 701: Removing The Inside Cover
Chapter 12 12.5.19.6 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000-5222 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 12.5.19.7 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000-5221 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2]. F-12-120 12.5.19.3 Removing the Inside Cover 0000-5217...
Page 702: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 12 12.5.19.8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000-5224 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB [2] together with its base. F-12-126 12.5.20 Main Power Switch 12.5.20.1 Removing the Upper...
Page 703: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb Cover
Chapter 12 F-12-129 12.5.20.6 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000-5197 F-12-127 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB. 12.5.20.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000-5195 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2].
Page 704: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 12 12.5.20.7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000-5198 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB [2] together with its base. F-12-132 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box.
Page 705 Chapter 12 F-12-139 F-12-137 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate [2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3]. 12.5.20.10 Removing Lattice Connector Mounting 0000-5201 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect all connectors; then, detach the lattice connector Mounting [2].
Page 706: Removing The Main Power Supply Switch
Chapter 12 12.5.21 Manual Feed Unit Open/ Closed Detecting Switch 12.5.21.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000-5236 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 12.5.21.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000-5237 F-12-141 1) Remove the lower rear cover. 12.5.20.13 Removing the Main 12.5.21.3 Removing the Left Power Supply Switch 0000-5204...
Page 707: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb Cover
Chapter 12 12.5.21.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000-5239 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2]. F-12-147 2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. F-12-145 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable.
Page 708: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 12 F-12-150 F-12-152 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, 12.5.21.8 Removing and open it. Registration Unit Open/ Closed Sensor Mounting 0000-5243 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the screw [2];...
Page 709: Front Cover Open/Closed Detecting Switch
Chapter 12 F-12-156 F-12-154 12.5.22.3 Removing the Inside 12.5.22 Front Cover Open/Closed Cover 0000-5206 Detecting Switch 1) Open the front cover and the drum unit cover. 2) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside 12.5.22.1 Removing cover [2]. Tonner Container release...
Page 710: Removing The Left Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 12 12.5.22.6 Removing the Left 12.5.22.8 Removing the DC Upper Rear Cover Controller Mounting 0000-5211 0000-5213 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove 12.5.22.7 Removing the DC the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB [2] together with its base.
Page 711: Cleaner Fan
Chapter 12 F-12-164 F-12-162 12.5.23.2 Removing 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the front cover Cleaner Fan 0000-5292 open/close switch [2]. 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the 3 claws; then, detach the cleaner fan [2]. F-12-163 12.5.23 Cleaner Fan F-12-165 12.5.24 Manual Feed Cooling Fan 12.5.23.1...
Page 712: Removing The Left Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 12 12.5.24.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000-5249 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 12.5.24.4 Removing Controller Box Cover 0000-5247 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power distribution PCB, and free the harness from the wire saddle [2];...
Page 713: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 12 F-12-172 F-12-169 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the 2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, and open it. F-12-170 F-12-173 12.5.24.7 Removing the DC...
Page 714: Removing The Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
Chapter 12 F-12-174 F-12-176 12.5.24.8 Removing the Fixing 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main Heat Discharge Fan 0000-5252 controller base [2]. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the fixing heat discharge fan [3].
Page 715: Removing The Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct
Chapter 12 12.5.24.10 Removing Lattice Connector Mounting 0000-5254 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect all connectors; then, detach the lattice connector Mounting [2]. F-12-181 12.5.24.12 Removing Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct 0000-5256 1) Slide out the manual fee unit; then, disconnect the connector [1] and remove the 2 screws [2] to detach F-12-179 the manual feed cooling fan duct [3].
Page 716: Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
Chapter 12 F-12-183 12.5.25 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 12.5.25.1 Removing the Upper F-12-184 Rear Cover 0000-5258 1) Remove the upper rear cover. 12.5.25.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000-5261 12.5.25.2 Removing the Lower 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC Rear Cover 0000-5259 controller PCB cover [2].
Page 717: Opening The Main Controller Box
Chapter 12 F-12-186 F-12-189 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the top of the main controller box. 12.5.25.6 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000-5263 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
Page 718: Removing The Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
Chapter 12 12.5.25.7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0000-5264 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the fixing heat discharge fan [3]. F-12-193 12.5.26.4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Mounting 0000-5296 1) Remove the 5 screws [1], and remove the power F-12-192 supply cooling fan mointing plate[2];...
Page 719: Delivery Cooling Fan
Chapter 12 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate [2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3]. F-12-195 F-12-197 12.5.27 Delivery Cooling Fan 12.5.27.4 Removing the Left 12.5.27.1 Removing the Upper Lower Rear cover 0000-5288 Rear Cover 0000-5285 1) Removing the left lower rear cover.
Page 720: Machine Heat Discharge Fan
Chapter 12 2) Remove the mounting screw [1] of the high-voltage cable, and free the high-voltage cable [2] from the cable clamp [3]; then, detach it from the edge saddle [4] of the high-voltage unit base. F-12-201 12.5.27.6 Removing Delivery Cooling Fan 0000-5290 F-12-199 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2...
Page 721: Removing The Left Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 12 12.5.28.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000-5276 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 12.5.28.4 Removing Controller Box Cover 0000-5274 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power distribution PCB, and free the harness from the wire saddle [2];...
Page 722 Chapter 12 F-12-209 F-12-206 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the 2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, and open it. F-12-207 F-12-210 12.5.28.7...
Page 723: Drum Unit Drive Belt
Chapter 12 12.5.29.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000-5330 1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 12.5.29.4 Removing Controller Box Cover 0000-5328 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power distribution PCB, and free the harness from the wire saddle [2];...
Page 724: Opening The Main Controller Box
Chapter 12 F-12-216 F-12-214 2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable.
Page 725: Removing The Dc Controller Mounting
Chapter 12 F-12-219 F-12-221 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, 12.5.29.8 Removing the Fixing and open it. Heat Discharge Fan 0000-5333 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2];...
Page 726 Chapter 12 12.5.29.10 Removing Lattice Connector Mounting 0000-5335 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect all connectors; then, detach the lattice connector Mounting [2]. F-12-223 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main controller base [2]. F-12-226 12.5.29.11 Removing High-Voltage Unit...
Page 727: Removing The Drum Itb Motor Mounting
Chapter 12 the rear side plate; lift it slightly to detach. F-12-228 F-12-230 12.5.29.12 Removing Manual Feed Cooling Fan 1) Free the DC harness [1] found at the front of the Duct 0000-5337 drum ITB motor base from the cable clamp [2]. 1) Slide out the manual fee unit;...
Page 728: Removing The Drum Drive Unit
Chapter 12 tension on the belt.) F-12-234 F-12-232 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the belt 12.5.29.14 Removing tension pulley cover [2]. (2 locations left/right) Drum Drive Unit 0000-5339 1) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1], and remove the 7 screws [2]: then, take out the drum drive unit [3].
Page 729: Chapter 13 Meap
Chapter 13 MEAP...
Page 731 Contents Contents 13.1 Overview ............................... 13-1 13.2 MEAP Counter .............................. 13-2 13.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform ......................13-4...
Page 733: Overview
Chapter 13 13.1 Overview 0007-0341 The term MEAP stands for Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform, and is used to generically refer to a platform for software built into MFPs and peripheral equipment. The architecture is based on Java (J2ME, i.e., Java 2 Platform Micro Edition), and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications.
Page 734: Meap Counter
Chapter 13 13.2 MEAP Counter 0007-0359 In addition to the commonly found print counters, a device that supports MEAP is equipped with a counter mechanism used to keep track of which functions are used as well as how often they are used for individual MEAP applications that are installed.
Page 735 Chapter 13 Notes: forced: the device forces the counter to increase its reading in response to execution of a job. in response to instructions from application: the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from the application. application independent: the counter operates according to the specifications of the application. 13-3...
Page 736: Construction Of The Meap Platform
Chapter 13 13.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform 0007-0346 In addition to the installation of the system software, language file, and RUI, a printer equipped with MEAP functions calls for the installation of MEAP content, which offers functions (system services) needed to run MEAP applications and class libraries needed by the MEAP applications to control the device.
Page 737: Chapter 14 Maintenance And Inspection
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Inspection...
Page 739 Contents Contents 14.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ........................... 14-1 14.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ........................14-1 14.1.2 Reader Unit/Color Image Reader-C1 ..................... 14-1 14.1.3 Printer Unit ............................. 14-1 14.2 Durables and Consumables ........................... 14-2 14.2.1 Outline ..............................14-2 14.2.2 Reader Unit/Color Image Reader-C1 ..................... 14-2 14.2.3 Printer Unit .............................
Page 741: Periodically Replaced Parts
Chapter 14 14.1 Periodically Replaced Parts 14.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts 0005-9998 Some parts of the machine must be periodically replaced to ensure a specific level of product performance (i.e., they may not show wear but can significantly affect the machine performance once they fail). If possible, schedule any periodical replacement so that it coincides with scheduled servicing.
Page 742: Durables And Consumables
Chapter 14 14.2 Durables and Consumables 14.2.1 Outline 0006-0002 Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more over the life of the product because of deterioration or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to the guide. Find Out When to Replace Use the following service mode to find out when it is best to replace a specific durable part.
Page 743 Chapter 14 as of May 2004 Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks [11] Separation roller (each FB6-3406 250,000 prints* actual number of cassette holder) prints [12] Feed roller (manual feeder) FB1-8581 120,000 prints* actual number of prints [13] Separation roller (manual FB5-0873 120,000 prints*...
Page 744: Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
Chapter 14 14.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 14.3.1 Scheduled Servicing (Reader Unit) 0006-0013 Do not use solvents or oils that are not indicated herein. T-14-2 Unit name Location Cleaning Remarks Optical assembly Scanner cable inspect if dirt is appreciable Optical path Scanner rail lubricate if dirt is appreciable...
Page 745 Chapter 14 Scanning lamp Dry wipe with lint-free paper. Reflecting plate Clean with a blower brush. No. 1 through No. 3 mirror Copyboard glass Use a blower brush; if dirt Clean the face/back and white plate. cannot be removed, dry wipe Scanner rail with lint-free paper.
Page 746: Scheduled Servicing (Printer Unit)
Chapter 14 14.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (Printer Unit) 0006-0015 Do not use solvents or oils that are not indicated herein. T-14-3 Maintenance intervals Unit name Location every 150,000 Other Remarks 40,000 Delivery unit Internal delivery clean if dirt is roller appreciable External delivery clean if dirt is...
Page 747 Maintenance intervals Unit name Location every 150,000 Other Remarks 40,000 Manual feed Pre-registration clean if dirt is registration unit roller appreciable Registration upper clean if dirt is roller appreciable Registration lower clean if dirt is roller appreciable Pickup vertical path clean if dirt is roller...
Page 748 Chapter 14 Scanning lamp Dry wipe with lint-free paper. Reflecting plate Clean with a blower brush. No. 1 through No. 3 mirror Copyboard glass Use a blower brush; if dirt Clean the face/back and white plate. cannot be removed, dry wipe Scanner rail with lint-free paper.
Page 749 Chapter 15 Standards and Adjustments...
Page 751 Contents Contents 15.1 Image Adjustments ............................15-1 15.1.1 Standards for Image Position ......................... 15-1 15.1.2 Checking the Image Position ........................15-1 15.1.3 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Cassette) ................... 15-2 15.1.4 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Manual Feed Tray) ................15-3 15.1.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Side Paper Deck) ................15-3 15.1.6 Duplex Unit ............................
Page 753: Image Adjustments
Chapter 15 15.1 Image Adjustments 2.0±1.5mm (2nd side of double-side copy: 2.0±1.5mm) 15.1.1 Standards for Image Position 0000-5345 The standards for the image margin/non-image width of prints made at 100% are as follows: 2.5±1.5mm (2nd side of double-sided copy: 2.5±2.0mm) F-15-4 15.1.2 Checking the Image 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20...
Page 754: Adjusting The Left/Right Margin (Cassette)
Chapter 15 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right front Decease the cover [2]. value of REGIST. (A decrease of ‘10’ 2.5±1.5mm will increase (2nd side of duplex the margin by 1 mm.) copy: 2.5±2.0mm) Leading edge of paper Increase the value of REGIST.
Page 755: Adjusting The Left/Right Margin (Manual Feed Tray)
Chapter 15 15.1.4 Adjusting the Left/ Right Margin (Manual Feed Tray) 0000-5348 Loosen the 2 screws [1], and move the position of the Moving the adjusting slide guide [2] to make adjustments. plate to the right Image Decrease the margin at the front of the paper.
Page 756: Duplex Unit
Chapter 15 15.1.6 Duplex Unit 0000-5350 Loosen the adjusting screw [1] to make adjustments. (A single graduation in the index will cause a change of approximately 1 mm.) - To move the paper to the rear, move it to the left. - To move the paper to the front, move it to the right.
Page 757: Scanning System
Chapter 15 15.2 Scanning System 15.2.1 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp 0000-5354 There is no particular work to perform after replacing the scanning lamp. 15.2.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass 0000-5355 Enter the value indicated on the copyboard glass (F01- 301-04) using the following service mode items: COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X/Y/Z Use it to enter data for the standard white plate.
Page 758: Laser Exposure System
Chapter 15 15.3 Laser Exposure System 15.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Unit 0000-5357 If you have replaced the laser unit, execute the following service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>L-ADJ-0 Use it to execute automatic adjustment of laser intensity. 15-6...
Page 759: After Replacing The Drum Unit
Chapter 15 15.4 Image Formation System 15.4.1 After Replacing the Drum Unit 0000-5358 There is no particular work to perform after replacing the drum unit. 15.4.2 After Replacing the Transfer Unit 0000-5359 There is no particular work to perform after replacing the transfer unit (intermediate transfer unit, secondary transfer unit).
Page 760: Fixing System
Chapter 15 15.5 Fixing System A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0.4 mm. A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the 15.5.1 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the the Fixing Unit rear by 0.2 mm.
Page 761: Electrical Components
Chapter 15 15.6 Electrical Components Use it to enter a color displacement correction value for sub scanning direction. COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CLF-R-GB 15.6.1 When Replacing the Use it to enter a color displacement correction value Reader Controller PCB for sub scanning direction. 0000-5362 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-RG - Set the DIP switch on the reader controller PCB to Use it to enter a color displacement correction value...
Page 762: When Replacing The Sram Pcb
Chapter 15 Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller clutch goes ON. COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for re- pickup. COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4R Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray. COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A6R Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for the F-15-22...
Page 763: When Replacing The Hdd
Chapter 15 care. 2) Turn off and then on the machine; when the machine has started up, perform the following in 1) When you turn on the power after replacing the user mode: SRAM PCB, the machine will execute automatic Make the following selections: user mode>system initialization and will indicate a message on its control settings>group ID control>count control;...
Page 764: Pickup/Feeding System
Chapter 15 15.7 Pickup/Feeding System 15.7.1 Adjusting Horizontal Registration When Replacing Pickup Cassette 0000-5368 Make a test copy of the A3 Test Chart, and check to F-15-25 be sure that the margin on the front side of the image is correct (L2 = 2.0 ±1.5 mm); otherwise, go through the following steps to make adjustments, starting with the 1st side and then the 2nd side: Adjusting the Horizontal Registration on the 1st Side...
Page 765 Chapter 15 F-15-28 Moving the adjusting plate to the right Image will decrease the margin on the front side of the paper. F-15-29 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration on the 2nd Side Use the following service mode to make adjustments: COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE 15.7.2 Adjusting Horizontal...
Page 766 Chapter 15 15-14...
Page 767 Chapter 16 Correcting Faulty Images...
Page 769 Contents Contents 16.1 Making lnitial Checks ........................... 16-1 16.1.1 Site Environment ............................ 16-1 16.1.2 Checking the Paper ..........................16-1 16.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ......................16-1 16.1.4 Checking the Durables ........................... 16-1 16.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts ....................16-1 16.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks ....................
Page 770 Contents 16.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment ......................16-88 16.3.5 Printing/scanning ........................... 16-88 16.3.5.1 No Output ............................16-88 16.3.5.2 Installation Failure ......................... 16-91 16.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result ....................16-92 16.3.6 Network ............................... 16-107 16.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure ........................... 16-107 16.3.6.2 Connection Problem ........................16-107 16.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related ........................
Page 771 Contents motor (Bk) not rotating (Refer to SymptomExplanation.) ..............16-132 16.3.10.22 E020-04B0 Cautions in replacing the drum unit ..............16-133 16.3.10.23 E020-0X81 Error Code Displaying because of an open/close failure of the SALT sensor shutter ............................16-134 16.3.10.24 E020-0124 Error Code ......................16-134 16.3.10.25 E020-OXB0 Error Code ......................
Page 772 Contents 16.3.10.70 E540 Error code detail There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray....... 16-154 16.3.10.71 E577 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction)..16-154 16.3.10.72 E580 Error code detail There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray......16-155 16.3.10.73 E584 Error code detail There is a fault in feed operation (No.
Page 773 Contents 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results (DC power supply unit PCB J158 output failure) ....................... 16-175 16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting up. Please wait" changes to error code indication ......................
Page 774 Contents 16.4.8.1 Plain Pedestal-C1 ......................... 16-198 16.4.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ......16-199 16.4.9.1 Adjusting the Variable Resistors (VR), the Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and the Check Pins by PCB ............................16-199 16.4.9.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................... 16-200 16.4.9.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) ......................
Page 775: Making Lnitial Checks
Chapter 16 16.1 Making lnitial Checks 16.1.1 Site Environment 0006-5663 Be sure of the following: a. The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%). The power plug remains connected throughout day and night. b. The site is not a high temperature/humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier), and it is not in a cold place.
Page 776 Chapter 16 - Check the window of the SALT sensor to see if it is free of dirt. [Transfer System] - Check the secondary transfer unit to see that it is free of foreign matter. - Check the ITB/secondary transfer external roller for wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation. - Check the blade of the ITB cleaning unit for tear, peeling, deformation, and stray toner.
Page 777: Others
Chapter 16 - Is the power plug properly connected? - Is the rated AC voltage present at the power outlet? - Are the sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids operating normally? Are the connectors free of poor contact? (Be sure to check the routes of power and signals by referring to the general circuit diagram.) - Has the leakage breaker or the circuit breaker gone ON? - Is there biting of a wire or a loose screw? - Are all eternal covers attached properly?
Page 778: Test Print
Chapter 16 16.2 Test Print 16.2.1 Outline 0006-5673 The machine offers 6 types of test prints (TYPE), enabling identification of a fault in images with reference to test prints. If a fault appearing on a normal print does not show on a test print, the cause may be assumed to be on the PDL input side or the reader unit side.
Page 779: Gradations (Type=4)
Chapter 16 16.2.4 Gradations (TYPE=4) 0006-5696 Use this test print to check gradation, fogging, white lines, or uneven density at the front/rear. a. Gradation If the reproduction of 16 gradations is not as expected, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure system. b.
Page 780: Grid (Type=6)
Chapter 16 COLOR-M=1, COLOR-Y/C/K=0 F-16-2 16.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) 0006-5700 Use this test print to check color displacement, right angle, or straight line. a. Color Displacement If color displacement occurs, suspect a fault in any of the laser exposure system, transfer (intermediate/secondary) unit, or photosensitive drum drive unit.
Page 781: Mcybk Horizontal Stripe (Type=10)
Chapter 16 16.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripe (TYPE=10) 0006-5702 Use this test print to check the density of dark areas of individual colors, balance among colors, and white lines in relation to development. a. Solid Density of Colors and Balance Among Colors - The density must not be appreciably low (light).
Page 782: Gradations (Type=12)
Chapter 16 16.2.8 Gradations (TYPE=12) 0006-5704 Use this test print to check the reproduction of gradation for all colors (YMCBk) at once. F-16-5 16.2.9 Full Color 16 Gradations (TYPE=14) 0006-5705 Use this test print to check gray balance, the reproduction of gradation for individual colors (YMCBk), or fogging. a.
Page 783: Troubleshooting
Chapter 16 16.3 Troubleshooting 16.3.1 Symptoms 16.3.1.1 Image Fault Case Studies (A4) 0000-5378 The following is a collection of faulty images that can occur on A4 or larger paper; they have been artificially created, and may slightly differ from actual faulty copies. A.
Page 784 Chapter 16 3. Uneven Density at 44-mm Intervals F-16-9 4. Uneven Density at Angle at 12-mm Intervals F-16-10 5. Uneven Density in vertical direction F-16-11 16-10...
Page 785 Chapter 16 6. Mottled Image F-16-12 7. Flow image on Side F-16-13 8. Toner Stray F-16-14 16-11...
Page 786 Chapter 16 9. 47-mm Horizontal Line F-16-15 10. 100-mm Horizontal Line F-16-16 11. White Spot Along Trailing Edge F-16-17 16-12...
Page 787 Chapter 16 12. Vertical Lines (Charging Roller) F-16-18 13. Trace of Delivery Clip F-16-19 14. Trace of Pickup Roller Along Leading Edge F-16-20 16-13...
Page 788: Image Fault Case Samples (A3)
Chapter 16 15. Trace of Pickup Roller F-16-21 16.3.1.2 Image Fault Case Samples (A3) 0000-5379 The following is a collection of faulty images that can occur on A3 or larger paper; they have been artificially created, and may slightly differ from actual faulty copies. 1.
Page 789 Chapter 16 2. 20 to 30-mm White Spot F-16-23 3. White Spots Leading Edge F-16-24 16-15...
Page 790 Chapter 16 4. Fine White Spot Near 30 mm of Trailing Edge F-16-25 5. Line Along Trailing Edge F-16-26 16-16...
Page 791 Chapter 16 6. Poor Parallel Reproduction Along Trailing Edge F-16-27 7. Rub off Along Trailing Edge F-16-28 16-17...
Page 792: Image Faults
Chapter 16 16.3.2 Image Faults 16.3.2.1 Blank Image 16.3.2.1.1 Blank page is output when printing scanned image 0004-0707 [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy Launch the file in question with 'Imaging' (selectable software by right-clicking) and print it. If the result is OK, the application software is likely to be a cause, so check its settings.
Page 793 Chapter 16 16.3.2.3.3 Uneven density of 12mm intervals in diagonal direction/Density at the rear is light: when continuously generating an image with a high color ratio 0002-3391 Symptom When an image with a high color ratio is generated continuously, the density at the rear tends to become too low (light).
Page 794 Chapter 16 Field Remedy Add a cassette heater (to keep the inside of the machine warm). Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>internal cleaning. The symptom may disappear when several prints have been made on A3 paper. 16.3.2.3.6 Traces of delivery roller on thick paper (particularly, coated paper): When making copy of high image duty original 0002-3503 [ Manual-related ]...
Page 795 Chapter 16 Field Remedy Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLV-UP.adverse effect of setting it to '1' the life of the drum unit will decrease. adverse effect of setting it to '2' the life of the drum unit will decrease, and the print productivity will also decrease.
Page 796 Chapter 16 F-16-29 16.3.2.3.10 Light image: appearing all over the page 0002-8528 Symptom Light image: appearing all over the page Cause As a result of inspection, reinstallation of the secondary transfer external roller solved the symptom. Field Remedy It is possible that the secondary transfer external roller is not installed properly, thus reinstall it again. 16-22...
Page 797 Chapter 16 F-16-30 16.3.2.3.11 Fine lines are not printed sharply when printing via UFR 0004-2919 [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy On the window of UFR printer properties, press 'Quality' tab and select 'Designs (CAD)' that appears under 'Objective'.
Page 798: Foggy Image
Chapter 16 16.3.2.4 Foggy Image 16.3.2.4.1 Ground color of cut-and-paste newspaper transferred to the copied image 0002-3252 Symptom When you use a cut-and-paste newspaper as an original, the ground color of the newspaper remains on the printed document. Description When you put newspaper on the whole copy board glass for an original, the ground color of the newspaper can be suppressed with the AE Function.
Page 799 Chapter 16 F-16-31 16.3.2.4.4 Fogging appearing on the entire Black image as if it were combed with a brush 0002-3330 Symptom Image appears to have been given a black wash. Cause The earth plate of the black drum unit contacts the earth pin of the main unit drum unit door guide (FF6-2110- 000).
Page 800 Chapter 16 Cause The developer is exposed to the moisture of the environment and, as a result, the charge on the toner decreases to increase the density. Field Remedy Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation adjustment>full correction. 16.3.2.4.6 Reverse fogging: appreciable when the drum unit has been in use for a long time in a low humidity environment 0002-3373 Symptom...
Page 801 Chapter 16 Cause When the machine is left alone for a long time, the level of charge on the toner tends to decrease. Field Remedy Generate about 10 prints of solid images of the color in question using A3 paper. 16.3.2.4.9 Color shift/Uneven density (rough texture): when continuously generating an image with low color ratio 0002-3406...
Page 802 Try replacing the CCD unit with a new one. After replacement, be sure to execute CCD-ADJ in service mode. 16.3.2.4.13 Fogging on the entire Cyan image 0003-2390 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description This symptom does not appear on the test print.
Page 803 Try unplugging/inserting the flat cables J307 and J308 on the Interface PCB. If the symptom is still not solved, try replacing the Interface PCB with a new one. 16.3.2.4.15 Fogging in Magenta appearing on entire image 0003-3077 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description This symptom does not appear on the test print. Cause As a result of inspection, the CCD unit was found to be faulty.
Page 804 Chapter 16 16.3.2.4.16 86mm-wide fogging in sub scanning direction 0003-8743 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description This symptom occurs only on copied images, not on a test print or printed images. Cause As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB (sub) was found to be faulty.
Page 805 Chapter 16 16.3.2.4.17 Fogging: after upgrading System Software to Ver.9.05 0003-8768 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy On System Software Ver.9.05, the gradation adjustment was improved. When upgrading it from Ver.8.04 and earlier to Ver.9.05 and later, be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after upgrading.
Page 806 Adjustment]. 16.3.2.4.21 Fogging under low humidity environment 0004-9774 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy Ever since DCON Ver.10.02 (DCON software which is to be installed simultaneously with System Ver.10.01), the service mode described below has been newly added in order to ease fogging which might occur under low humidity environment.
Page 807 Chapter 16 16.3.2.4.22 Fogging with BK cartridge that has been used for a certain period of time 0004-9776 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy Ever since DCON Ver.10.02 (DCON software which is to be installed simultaneously with System Ver.10.01), the service mode described below has been newly added in order to ease fogging which might occur with the BK cartridge that has been used for a certain period of time.
Page 808 No problem on print from computer and test print 0005-1922 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, it was found that the Reader Controller PCB was faulty. If this symptom occurs, replace it with a new one.
Page 809: Uneven Density
Chapter 16 Follow the steps below: 1. Make sure that the interface cable connecting the reader unit and the printer unit is securely fitted. 2. Check whether this symptom was resolved by performing "CCD-ADJ" and "SH-PS-ST" in service mode [COPIER> Function> CCD> CCD-ADJ, SH-PS-ST]. When selecting the item, the adjustment will start automatically.
Page 810 Chapter 16 16.3.2.5.2 Uneven density at about 6mm intervals in the sub scanning direction 0002-3292 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause As a result of inspection, this symptom occurred because the secondary transfer roller was not properly installed at the designated position.
Page 811 16.3.2.5.6 Mottled image: when large numbers of prints are made daily and, the drum unit has been in use for a long time 0002-3400 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause The toner in the developing assembly is caking into lumps.
Page 812 Chapter 16 Field Remedy With care, use the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TR-ENV/ TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-DUP. Adverse effect of changing the setting: it can worsen white spots, transfer faults, or fogging (rough texture). 16.3.2.5.10 Uneven image in main scanning direction: when copying in a single color 0002-8530 Symptom Uneven image in main scanning direction: when copying in a single color...
Page 813 16.3.2.5.12 Coarse image or brushed image only on Cyan areas: Occurs on both copies and test prints 0006-4447 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the DC Controller PCB was faulty.
Page 814: Out Of Focus
Chapter 16 16.3.2.6 Out of Focus 16.3.2.6.1 Torsion spring coming off or displaced: locating close to the back of the pattern reader unit 0002-3218 Symptom Printed image is displaced, because a spring of the attaching part (on the main body), in the backside of the pattern reader unit, has come off, or because the spring hook is not properly located.
Page 815 An adjustment for duplex side registration has been added with System software Ver.4.03. It can be made in service mode [COPIER>Adjust>FEED-ADJ>REGIST2]. 16.3.2.6.5 Color registration failure on thick paper in sub scanning direction 0003-6310 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Simptom Color registration failure on thick paper in sub scanning direction Field Remedy A solution against color registration failure of thick paper has been added with System software Ver.3.16.
Page 816 16.3.2.6.8 Color displaces approx. 3mm away from right position in sub scanning direction 0005-1908 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy If the back side of the ITB soils after long usage, the ITB is not driven properly and each color displaced approximately 3mm away from their right position.
Page 817: Partially Blank/Streaked
16.3.2.6.10 Image is shifted in main scanning direction when printing via UFR, no problem on copied or scanned images 0005-6104 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] < Field Remedy > As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty.
Page 818 Chapter 16 F-16-42 16.3.2.7.2 White spots like bubbles and wave-shaped white spots: 5cm of the rear 0002-3291 Symptom White spots like bubbles and wave-shaped white spots: 5cm of the rear Cause A ground is unstable because of a warpage of the grounding plate for the secondary transfer at the rear side of the machine.
Page 819 Chapter 16 F-16-43 16.3.2.7.3 47mm horizontal line on full color image: when the amount of toner deposited on the drum changes abruptly over the entire length of the drum axis 0002-3419 Symptom An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis when full color image is made.
Page 820 Chapter 16 16.3.2.7.4 47mm horizontal line on Bk image: when the amount of toner deposited on the drum changes abruptly over the entire length of the drum axis 0002-3421 Symptom An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis when monochrome image is made.
Page 821 Chapter 16 16.3.2.7.7 White spots along trailing edge of halftone image on the 2nd side of duplex print made after generating several sheets of simplex print in a high humidity environment (e.g. for the first time in the morning) 0002-3429 Symptom In a high humidity environment, a white spot occurs along the trailing edge of a halftone image on the 2nd side of a double-sided print made after generating a single-sided print and turning on the power (e.g., for the first...
Page 822 16.3.2.7.11 A fine, white line around 30mm of the trailing edge on A3 paper 0002-3460 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause When the temperature at both ends of the fixing roller rises, the roller pressure becomes higher there. Under this condition, it is possible the trailing edge of paper jumps.
Page 823 Chapter 16 16.3.2.7.13 Lines along the trailing edge on A3 or larger paper 0002-3474 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause As paper is looped between the secondary transfer external roller and the fixing roller, an electrical discharge occurs when its trailing edge leaves the intermediate transfer belt.
Page 824 Chapter 16 Symptom In a high humidity environment, a white spot occurs along the edge of the paper in a halftone image on the 2nd side of a double-sided print. Cause The paper is moist, and tends to become wavy after fixing on its 1st side; as a result, the wavy area prevents proper transfer on the 2nd side and, ultimately, causes a white spot.
Page 825 16.3.2.7.19 Void appearing at approx. 9.5mm from the edge (corresponding to machine's front side) in sub scanning direction 0004-0688 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because grease was transferred to the secondary transfer roller.
Page 826 Chapter 16 F-16-45 16-52...
Page 827 16.3.2.7.22 Streaks appearing in sub scanning direction when making a copy of color and monochrome originals at a time 0004-9761 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy This problem has been corrected with System Ver.10.01. So, if this happens, upgrade the system to Ver.10.01 and later.
Page 828: Smudged/Streaked
Chapter 16 16.3.2.7.23 Color voids at image lead edge when outputting SRA3 or 12x18" paper 0004-9762 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy When outputting SRA3 or 12x18" paper under the measure for color displacement on thick paper activated in service mode, color voids may occur at the image lead edge.
Page 829 Chapter 16 be moved 1mm toward the delivery (rear) side In service mode no 6 SCANNER>7.CCD>>Parameter 018(xxx) If you implement the procedure above mentioned, the position is moved 1mm forward, and then increase the following value by 10 from the factory setting so that the leading registration can be adjusted by 1mm. In service mode NO 6 SCANNER>7 CCD>Parameter 024(xxx).
Page 830 16.3.2.8.9 Shade of original appears at lead edge of output image when making a copy by selecting 'Entire Image' 0003-2777 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Cause If one-by-one (direct) copy is selected, shade of the original will not appear on the output image because it should be printed on the lead edge margin area.
Page 831 16.3.2.8.11 35mm-wide lines in sub scanning direction appearing at a location corresponding to the machine's rear side 0003-8742 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB was found to be faulty. (In this inspection, the symptom continuously occurred once it started;...
Page 832 Chapter 16 F-16-48 16.3.2.8.12 Fine lines appearing randomly in main scanning direction 0003-8791 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB (sub) was found to be faulty. Field Remedy Replace the main controller PCB (sub) with a new one.
Page 833 Chapter 16 F-16-49 16.3.2.8.13 Toner soiling 0004-0726 [ Case in the field ] Description This symptom is likely to occur during continuous outputting. Field Remedy 1. If the soiling occurs with primary colors (YMCK), the drum unit is likely to be faulty. So, inspect the drum unit.
Page 834: Ghost / Memory
16.3.2.8.17 Lines appear in main scanning direction on A4-sized copies, in sub scanning direction on A3-sized copies 0005-9418 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Reader Controller PCB was faulty.
Page 835 Chapter 16 Image1 F-16-50 Image2 F-16-51 16-61...
Page 836: Poor Finxing
Chapter 16 16.3.2.9.2 Drum positive ghost in halftone image: occurring after outputting solid images 0002-3486 Symptom A drum positive ghost occurs in a halftone image after generation of a solid image. Cause A residual charge exists on the photosensitive drum. Field Remedy Set '2'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
Page 837 Chapter 16 1. Because of chattering of the fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor, the DC controller PCB mistakenly considers the fixing feeder unit to be slid out and starts the temperature control of the fixing unit at 0 degrees C. 2.
Page 838: Faulty Color Reproduction
16.3.2.11 Faulty Color Reproduction 16.3.2.11.1 White area becomes gray when making a copy by selecting 'Nega/Posi' 0003-8641 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy Color reproductivity for 'Nega/Posi' copy has been improved to the level of the previous models with System software Ver.9.05.
Page 839: Stretching/Shrinking
Clear of RCON RAM can be done in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> R-CON]. 16.3.2.11.5 PS-C1: Running 'ColorCAL' degrades gradation quality 0004-9854 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy The quality of gradation may be degraded by running 'ColorCAL', as compared with the previous.
Page 840: Faulty Feeding
Chapter 16 16.3.3 Faulty Feeding 16.3.3.1 Double-Feed/ Multiple Feed 16.3.3.1.1 Multifeed of transparencies 0002-3527 Symptom Multiple transparencies are moved at the same time. Cause The transparencies are attracted to each other by the work of static charge. Field Remedy Fan out the transparencies. 16.3.3.1.2 Multifeed (gloss paper, tracing paper, or some thick paper) 0002-3532 Symptom...
Page 841: Wrinkle
Add a cassette internal sheet. 16.3.3.3.2 Paper wrinkle 0005-4653 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] < Field Remedy > If the host machine has been left for a long time in stand-by state or low-power mode state, the fixing roller may be deformed due to its nip pressure, causing paper to be wrinkled.
Page 842: Wrap
Chapter 16 16.3.3.5 Wrap 16.3.3.5.1 Paper separation failure at fuser: when generating an image with a high color ratio in a high humidity environment 0002-3538 Symptom The leading edge of paper tends to resist separation in a high humidity environment and when the image has a high color ratio.
Page 843 Chapter 16 16.3.4.1.2 Machine not booting up, LCD not lighting up: Even after three minutes have passed from the power-ON, only the power lamp lights up, but not the LCD. (Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J157) 0002-2501 Symptom Even after three minutes have passed from the power-ON, neither the power lamp nor the control panel lights up.
Page 844: Control Panel-Related
16.3.4.1.4 PS-C1: Not start up while 'Please Wait' keeps displaying. iRC3200 Ver.9.05, PS-C1 Ver1.1.1 0005-3242 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] < Field Remedy > Shut down the power of PS-C1 and iRC3200, and unplug the LAN cable connecting to network. Then, turn ON the power of both devices.
Page 845 Chapter 16 Field Remedy When this symptom occurs, replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one. FG3-2854 Main Controller PCB 16.3.4.2.2 LCD on control panel not lighting up, remaining black 0002-3464 Symptom LCD on control panel not lighting up, remaining black Description The main power indicator lights up and the machine starts the initial rotation.
Page 846: Counter Malfunction
16.3.4.2.7 Streaks appear at intervals of 2cm; recurs after replacement of control panel 0005-9419 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was faulty.
Page 847 Chapter 16 Cause Static noise would be happened if optinal cassette unit and iR1600 are not connected well to ground. It causes bad communication between optinal cassette unit and iR1600, then iR1600 stopps paper feeding.'Close the front cover' message would be indicated when paper jam happen caused by reason above, the message will be indicated though jammed paper is removed and front cover is closed.
Page 848 16.3.4.4.4 Host machine reboots when "Reservation copies can be made." message is displayed on LCD: FAX unit is installed 0002-3467 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the SRAM Board PCB was found to be faulty.
Page 849 Initialize 'Copy Settings'. In user mode [Copy Settings>Initialize Copy Settings], select 'Yes'. 16.3.4.4.8 Machine rebooting or hanging up (locking up/nonoperational) upon release of FAX line 0003-8643 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver.9.05. If the machine you are servicing is earlier than Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
Page 850 Chapter 16 16.3.4.4.14 iRC3200 reboots repeatedly after FAX board is installed 0005-6103 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] < Field Remedy > As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was faulty.
Page 851: Noise
16.3.4.5.4 PS-C1: Fan is noisy 0005-4286 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] < Field Remedy > The fan has been changed to a low-noise type. When changing the fan, install nylon snaps (4 pieces per one fan) together.
Page 852: User Warning Message
Chapter 16 16.3.4.5.5 Abnormal noise from fixing ass'y 0005-4657 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] < Field Remedy > If the host machine has been left for a long time in stand-by state or low-power mode state, the fixing roller may be deformed due to its nip pressure, causing abnormal noise from the fixing ass'y during printing.
Page 853 Chapter 16 16.3.4.6.2 Copying cannot be started as 'Waiting' is displayed. 0002-1883 Symptom Copying cannot be started as 'Waiting' is displayed. Field Remedy Although a specific cause has not been determined, try turning the power OFF/ON. 1) Status line = 'Waiting', Dialog = 'Waiting': The above are displayed when the job cannot be started for some reasons during the waiting status.
Page 854 Chapter 16 Items to Check The drum life can be checked in the following service mode. Service mode level 1 COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > Y, M, C, K-DRM-LF Drum unit life (Y/M/C/K ) appropriate range is 0 to 100. Field Remedy The default settings can be changed according to the following service mode: *Service mode level 1 COPIER >...
Page 855 "Standard Mode for Manual Feed Paper" in User Mode. 16.3.4.6.6 Message 'Close the front cover.' keeps displaying 0003-2348 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description This message does not disappear even after replacement of the front cover open/close switch.
Page 856 16.3.4.6.10 Machine locking up/hanging up/nonoperational with message 'Adjusting gradation. Please wait a moment.' 0004-9853 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy When the front cover is opened during quick correction/full correction/at-rest gradation control, a message 'Adjusting gradation. Please wait a moment.' keeps displaying in the next job.
Page 857: Other Defect
Chapter 16 16.3.4.6.15 Message 'Insert drum cartridge. (color)' is displayed 0005-6127 [ Case in the field ] < Field Remedy > In the field, this symptom occurred because the Memory PCB was faulty. If the message does not disappear even after the drum unit is replaced, replace the Memory PCB with a new one. Memory PCB: FG3-2345 16.3.4.6.16 When attempting to access iRC3200 via Remote UI, message 'User information is invalid' is displayed...
Page 858 Chapter 16 16.3.4.7.2 Flaming or Blanking inoperative: When a document is set on the ADF, the function [Special Features>Area Designation>Pen Entry>Flaming or Blanking] is inoperative. 0002-2517 Symptom When a document is set on the ADF, the following feature is not available: Special Features > Area Designation >...
Page 859 Chapter 16 16.3.4.7.5 Card Reader-D1: Cautions upon installation 0002-2656 Symptom Card Reader-D1: Cautions upon installation Field Remedy The installation procedures for the Card Reader-D1 is that the lowest number of the cards that are to be used should be entered in service mode [COPIER>Function>INSTALL>CARD], and then the power is turned OFF/ DO NOT turn the power OFF until the entered number is displayed on the LCD (it will take 5 to 10 seconds).
Page 860 Chapter 16 16.3.4.7.9 Even after installing send kit, 'SEND' tab is not displayed on LCD 0004-0681 [ Case in the field ] Description Installation of the send kit has been successfully completed. Cause There is a case in the field that the symptom was corrected by reinstalling the Resolution Switching Board. Field Remedy It is possible that the Resolution Switching Board is not properly recognized.
Page 861 Chapter 16 16.3.4.7.13 PS-C1: Screen does not change while 'Please Wait' screen keeps displaying 0004-9713 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy When 'Please Wait' screen appears, it does not change until pressing Close button. This symptom has been corrected with a combination of the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1 and iRC3200 system Ver.10.01 so that the next...
Page 862: Part Breakage/Detachment
16.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment 16.3.4.8.1 DADF-K1 does not start to pick up originals 0005-6114 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] < Field Remedy > As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the 14T gear (FS7-0478) in the separation drive unit was faulty.
Page 863 16.3.5.1.5 PS-C1: Hanging up during continuous scanning 0003-2779 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Cause When FieryScan is kept running, the data will remain inside memory without being released (memory full). This will cause PS-C1 to hang up.
Page 864 Chapter 16 16.3.5.1.8 Unable to output attached file in e-mail sent from computer to iRC3200 0004-0658 [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy A file attached to an e-mail from a computer to iRC3200 should be: A4, monochrome, resolution 200x200dpi and TIFF format. If not, it will result in an error. Note that there is no limitation when an e-mail is sent from iRC3200 to a computer.
Page 865: Installation Failure
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-2854 16.3.5.1.17 When printing through UFR, host machine halts with message 'Canceling' 0005-6596 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] < Field Remedy > When the print job reaches the upper impression limit that has been specified using [Dept. ID Management] feature, the host machine may halt with a message 'Canceling'.
Page 866: Faulty Printing/Scanning Result
Chapter 16 16.3.5.2.2 Color Network Scan Gear cannot be installed 0003-2790 [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy If a computer is Windows NT4.0/2000/XP, log in by [Administrator] and install the color network scan gear. 16.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result 16.3.5.3.1 Tip for scanning with Acrobat under auto duplex mode by using ADF 0002-1577 Symptom Tip for scanning with Acrobat under auto duplex mode by using ADF...
Page 867 Chapter 16 16.3.5.3.3 Printing unavailable with PS-C1: Setup menu not displayed 0002-1859 Symptom Printing unavailable with PS-C1: Setup menu not displayed Field Remedy PS-C1 is applicable only with MN-CONT Ver.6.02 and later. The setup menu can be displayed in the following procedure: In service mode [COPIER>Option>INT-FACE>IMG-CONT], change from '0' to '3'.
Page 868 Chapter 16 16.3.5.3.7 How to set image density scanned by network scan 0003-2386 [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In user mode [Common Settings>Gamma Value for Remote Scans], select a desired value. The default is Gamma 1.8. 16.3.5.3.8 Output order is retrograde when making a copy from DF after 'Tray B' has been designated as a delivery tray for copy 0003-2402 [ Manual-related ]...
Page 869 16.3.5.3.13 PS-C1: When outputting to Direct queue on MacOS, halftone setting specified on Illustrator not reflected on actual printing 0004-9765 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy When outputting to Direct queue, the halftone setting specified on Illustrator may not be reflected to the actual printing but changed to the default setting.
Page 870 PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one. Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-2854 16.3.5.3.19 PS-C1: Image data attached to document becomes mirror image 0003-8610 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Description This symptom can occur in the combination below: Operating System: Windows 98/Me...
Page 871 Chapter 16 4. Select a profile from the list and click Set As Default button. 5. Click OK button to close the properties. Then, select ICM Mode from the Matching Mode list box on the Matching tab sheet in the Color Settings dialog and submit the job to the printer.
Page 872 Chapter 16 F-16-54 16.3.5.3.21 To Set Custom Paper Size 0002-5432 Symptom Overview This document shows how to set custom pager sizes. Cause For each driver version, you have to open different dialogs to reach to the Custom Paper Size Setting dialog. It is not easy to find the dialog.
Page 873 Chapter 16 PrinterPropaties F-16-55 Click Custom Paper Size button on Page Setup tab sheet. Page Setup Tab Sheet Page Setup F-16-56 16-99...
Page 874 Chapter 16 Click Custom Paper Size button on Page Setup tab sheet. Page Setup Tab Sheet Custom Paper Size Settings F-16-57 16-100...
Page 875 Chapter 16 Select the defined paper size from the Output Size dropdown list box on the Page Setup tab sheet. Output Size (Fig) OutPutSize F-16-58 16-101...
Page 876 Chapter 16 On Device Settings tab sheet, click Form to Tray Assignment button. Select Stack Bypass from Paper Source list and the defined paper size from the Paper Size dropdown list box. (Fig) Device Settings F-16-59 16-102...
Page 877 Chapter 16 On the Properties Dialog without Custom Paper Size Button No Custom Paper Size Button! (Fig) No Custom Paper Size Button F-16-60 16-103...
Page 878 Chapter 16 Select Start > Settings > Printers and select the printer for setting custom paper size. On the menu bar in Printers window, select File > Server Properties. Server Properties (Fig) Server Propaties F-16-61 16-104...
Page 879 Chapter 16 On Form tab sheet, select the Create a New Form option. Enter an appropriate name in the Form Description text box. Under Measurements, enter appropriate values for Paper Size and Printer Area Margins fields. Notes: For setting Paper Size and Printer Area Margins, enter values within the range specified for the printer. The printer driver does not show the custom paper sizes with values that exceed the specified range.
Page 880 Chapter 16 16.3.5.3.22 Printing Does Not Restart after Making up Paper 0002-5438 Symptom Overview The conditions to reproduce the problem are: After making up, leave the printer for about 3 to 25 minutes before it restarts printing. On Windows 2000 with SP1, SP2, and SP3. It does not occur on Windows 2000 without service pack. With Standard TCP/IP (RAW) Port Cause The host does not send SNMP for several minutes, holding the spooler status in error.
Page 881: Network
[SNMP Settings]: If you want to set or browse each item of the machine with utility software that uses SNMP to obtain information, set it to 'On'. [Enable Dedicated Port]: If you want to set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility software, set it to 'On'.
Page 882: Transmission/Fax-Related
Chapter 16 16.3.6.2.3 Printing Is Not Performed after Long Time Sleep 0002-5442 Symptom Overview Printing is not performed after a log time sleep when the network uses 10/100 Base hubs. Cause While iR C3200 is sleeping, it cannot communicate with the hub. The network board in the printer cannot detect the hub's transfer rate properly.
Page 883 Chapter 16 16.3.7.1.2 ##765 only with a specific destination 0002-1955 Symptom ##765 only with a specific destination Description The result is the same even by dialing the fax number on numerical keys. Field Remedy Change the following settings as below: 1.
Page 884 Chapter 16 16.3.7.1.4 Lines in the main scanning direction at about 4mm intervals: on FAX received image at receiving side 0002-4750 Symptom Lines in the main scanning direction at about 4mm intervals: on FAX received image at receiving side Description This symptom does not occur on copied images.
Page 885 Chapter 16 16.3.7.1.5 One-sheet original is output in two sheets at receiving side 0003-2300 [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy Make the sender information smaller or change the printing position of the transmission terminal ID. [How to make sender information smaller] In service mode [FAX>NCU>SPECIAL-B>SW28], change bit6 to '1'.
Page 886 Chapter 16 16.3.7.1.10 Transmission error sometimes occurring when sending I-Fax 0004-2921 Description E-mail transmission results in successfully. Field Remedy If the data size of the document to be sent exceeds the upper limit, a transmission error occurs when being sent as an I-Fax.
Page 887 16.3.7.1.17 iRC3200 displays 'Too many jobs are specified.' upon FAX TX, with Resolution Switch PCB installed 0005-6107 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] < Field Remedy > As a result of inspection, it was found that the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Replace it with a new one.
Page 888 16.3.7.1.19 Fax number is not entered partially (in the actual failure case, 2nd digit) 0007-4511 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description If you enter a fax number using the numerical keys without pressing the "Fax" key immediately after switching to the "Send"...
Page 889: Reception Problem
Please explain the users the meaning of the # 899. Remarks This code appears when data is transmitted in Canon FTP with iW Gateway. 16.3.7.2 Reception Problem 16.3.7.2.1 Faint lines in the main scanning direction at about 1mm intervals: on FAX received image...
Page 890: Other Operational Defect
Chapter 16 16.3.7.2.3 iRC3200 does not output FAX RX documents although reception has been completed successfully 0005-6108 [ Case in the field ] < Field Remedy > In the field, this symptom occurred because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Remove and reinsert the PCB.
Page 891: Jam Code
16.3.8.3 0105 Jam Code: Occurs with machine having mylar sheet to fixing/feeder sensor flag 0002-3570 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy Check whether the mylar sheet is properly attached to the fixing/feeder sensor flag. If not, reattach it or replace the sensor flag with a new one.
Page 892: Jam Code 0108, 0207
16.3.8.7 0207 Jam Code: Because of deformation of internal delivery roller 0007-9931 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description The internal delivery roller was deformed by heat after long use and this degraded its paper delivery capability, causing a paper jam. As a solution, in order to prevent the roller from being deformed by heat, a new part "Delivery Cooling Fan Cable"...
Page 893: A06 Jam Code
Chapter 16 iR C3200 (UK 230V): QLZ01829 iR C3200N (UK 230V): JBC02062 iR C3200 (FRN 230V): SLZ01812 iR C3200N (FRN 230V): JBQ02319 iR C3200 (GER 230V): TLZ01233 iR C3200N (GER 230V): JCJ01781 iR C3200 (ITA 230V): SSX00987 iR C3200N (ITA 230V): JCK00405 iR C3200 (A/B 230V): SSY00265 iR C3200N (A/B 230V): JCL01323 iR C3200 (AU 230V): RLZ02229...
Page 894: Jam Code 0B00/0105
Chapter 16 Field Remedy Perform CheckItem and replace the duplexing driver PCB, if faulty. Duplexing Driver PCB Ass'y Part No. FG6-9671-000 16.3.8.10 JAM CODE 0B00/0105 0002-5010 Symptom JAM CODE 0B00/0105: 0B00 Front Cover Open/Close Sensor Jam 0105 Registration Delay Jam Field Remedy JAM CODE 0B00 is for front cover open/close jam and JAM CODE 0105 is for registration delay jam.
Page 895: Error Code
Chapter 16 16.3.10 Error Code 16.3.10.1 E000 Error code detail The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on is inadequate. 0002-1288 Symptom E000 The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on is inadequate. (Error code detail) Description T-16-2 Detail...
Page 896: E002 Error Code Detail The Rise In Temperature Of The Fixing Unit Is Inadequate
Chapter 16 16.3.10.3 E002 Error code detail The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate. 0002-1593 Symptom E002 The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate. (Error code detail) Description T-16-4 Detail Description Timing of detection 0002 The output of the non-contact thermistor does not reach 60°C within 240 sec after it has reached 40°C.
Page 897: E003 Error Code Detai The Temperature Of The Fixing Unit Is Abnormally Low After Standby
Chapter 16 16.3.10.4 E003 Error code detai The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby. 0002-1594 Symptom E003 The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby. (Error code detail) Description T-16-5 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 After standby, the reading of the non-contact thermistor remains 120°C or less for 10 sec.
Page 898: Implementing Countermeasure Against Malfunction Of Fixing Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor
16.3.10.7 E004-0005 Error Code: Because of faulty DC Controller PCB 0006-2042 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description E004-0005 can be displayed when a short circuit of the main thermistor (TH1) is detected for 500 msec continuously.
Page 899: E004-0007 Error Code: Occasionally Occurs First In The Morning
Chapter 16 16.3.10.8 E004-0007 Error Code: Occasionally occurs first in the morning 0006-4441 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description E004-0007 can be displayed when temperature monitored by the sub thermistor becomes 140 degrees C or lower. Cause As a result of inspection, the following were found: - When a jam code "0107"...
Page 900: E012 Error Code Detail The Drum Itb Motor Is Faulty
Chapter 16 16.3.10.10 E012 Error code detail The drum ITB motor is faulty. 0002-1616 Symptom E012 The drum ITB motor is faulty. (Error code detail) Description T-16-7 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The ITB drum motor The lock (normal state) signal is not detected fails to rotate.
Page 901: To A Microswitch Pcb Failure
Chapter 16 Items to Check 1) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR, enter 1 and press the OK key. 2) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR-ON, press the OK key to check whether the motor is working normally.
Page 902: E012-0001 Error Code: Drum Itb Motor, Dc Power Supply Pcb And Fuse Pcb Work Normally
16.3.10.14 E012-0001 Error Code: Drum ITB Motor, DC Power Supply PCB and Fuse PCB work normally 0005-6214 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Door Switch Ass'y was faulty.
Page 903: E020-0134 Error Code Recurring Even After Replacement Of Yellow Drum Unit
Chapter 16 16.3.10.16 E020-0134 Error code Recurring even after replacement of yellow drum unit 0002-1622 Symptom E020-0134: recurring even after replacement of yellow drum unit Cause The ITB is not properly pressurized and a sample patch for ATR control is not formed on the ITB. Field Remedy There is a possibility that the ITB is not pressurized due to a breakage of the lock lever in the are applying the pressure to the ITB.
Page 904 Chapter 16 Detail Description Timing of detection xx25 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new drum SALT sensor. unit has been fitted. It is detected during The ITB has deteriorated. ATR control or in about 150 sec after idle rotation of the developing assembly.
Page 905: E020-Xx81: Generally E020-0181 Error Code
Chapter 16 Detail Description Timing of detection xx81 The actual value is considerably high The fault occurs while ATR control is in relation to the ITB surface being executed. reflectance when a new drum is fitted. xxA0 The measured value of the developer The fault occurs when an image is concentration is considerably low.
Page 906: E020-0081 Error Code Displaying When A Copy Is Made With The Service Case Removed
Chapter 16 Field Remedy 1. When E020-0181 occurs, first check whether the service case is installed inside the front door. If not, install it to the designated position. 2. Check whether the SALT sensor is soiled with toner. If it is, slide the cleaning device several times or clean the sensor with a blower brush.
Page 907: E020-04B0 Cautions In Replacing The Drum Unit
Chapter 16 Symptom After installation, when about 200 to 300 sheets have been fed through, the toner container motor (Bk) does not rotate and error E020-04B0 is displayed. (Supplementary reference) Description * E020-0xB0 detection timing Reduced T/D ratio due to life of drum unit. Broken wire in ATR sensor. If the toner container motor does not rotate and toner is not supplied to the drum unit, the toner in the drum unit will gradually run out and the T/D ratio will get lower.
Page 908: E020-0X81 Error Code Displaying Because Of An Open/Close Failure Of The Salt Sensor Shutter
Chapter 16 Field Remedy * E020-0xB0 detection timing Reduced T/D ratio due to life of drum unit. Broken wire in ATR sensor. If the toner container motor does not rotate and toner is not supplied to the drum unit, the toner in the drum unit will gradually run out and the T/D ratio will get lower.
Page 909: E020-Oxb0 Error Code
Chapter 16 F-16-66 16.3.10.25 E020-OXB0 Error Code 0002-3551 Symptom E020-0XB0 Cause This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y becomes low. It is also displayed when the drum unit has exceeded the end of its life. Field Remedy 1.
Page 910: E020-Xxa0 Error Code
Chapter 16 16.3.10.27 E020-xxA0 Error Code 0002-3556 Symptom E020-xxA0 Cause This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y has exceeded the specified value. measured value developer concentration less service mode [COPIER>Display>DENS>SGNL-Y/M/C/K]. Field Remedy 1. Check whether the cables of the ATR sensor in the developing ass'y are broken or not. If the value displayed by selecting service mode [COPIER>Display>DENS>SGNL-Y/M/C/K] is 0, the cables can be broken.
Page 911: E020-0125 Error Code
Chapter 16 16.3.10.30 E020-0125 Error Code 0004-5069 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy E020-0125 can be displayed when there is a fault/open circuit in the SALT sensor, a fault in the drum unit, or the ITB is deteriorated.
Page 912: E110-0X10 Error Code
Chapter 16 Description T-16-10 Detail Description Timing of detection 0110 The rotation of the Y laser The motor lock signal remains in an unlock scanner motor is faulty. state for 1 sec or more while the laser scanner motor is in operation. 0210 The rotation of the M laser The motor lock signal remains in an unlock...
Page 913: E202 Error Code Detail A Fault Has Occurred In Detecting The No. 1 Mirror Home Position
Chapter 16 16.3.10.35 E202 Error code detail A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position. 0002-1639 Symptom E202 A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position. (Error code detail) Description T-16-11 Detail Description Timing of detection 0000...
Page 914: E220 Error Code Detail A Fault Has Occurred In Activating The Scanning Lamp
CCD is below a specific level. 16.3.10.38 E220-0000 Error Code: Entire image sometimes becomes tinged with 0002-2536 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause As a result of inspection, the CCD unit was found to be faulty. Field Remedy Replace the CCD unit with a new one.
Page 915: E220-0000 Error Code
Chapter 16 [Image tinged with red] F-16-68 [Normal Image] 16.3.10.39 E220-0000 Error Code 0002-3288 Symptom E220-0000 Description Although the power lamp lights up once, E220-0000 is displayed immediately. Cause Poor contact of the flat cable (J102) which is connected to the CCD unit. Poor contact of the flat cable (J205) which is connected to the RCON.
Page 916: E220-0000 Error Code: Scanning Lamp Did Not Light Up After Turning Power On
Chapter 16 16.3.10.41 E220-0000 Error Code: Scanning lamp did not light up after turning power ON 0004-8991 [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy E220-0000 can be displayed when the intensity detected by the CCD becomes below a specific level during shading adjustment at time of power-ON.
Page 917: Of J204 On Reader Controller Pcb, Irc3220
Chapter 16 16.3.10.44 E220-0000 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, because of poor contact of J204 on Reader Controller PCB, iRC3220 0008-1581 [ Case in the field ] Description Because the flat cable J204 on the Reader Controller PCB had poor contact, E220 was displayed at power-on upon installation.
Page 918: E302 Error Code Detail A Fault Has Occurred In Relation To Shading Correction
Chapter 16 16.3.10.47 E302 Error code detail A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction. 0002-1647 Symptom E302 A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction. (Error code detail) Description T-16-15 Detail Description Timing of detection 0000 A time-out has occurred in The shading processing does not end 1 shading operation.
Page 919: E351 Error Code Detail The Eco-Id Pcb Is Faulty
There is a fault in the initial communication. 16.3.10.51 E351-0000 Error Code: Because of poor connection of connector on ECO-ID PCB 0006-6281 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description E351-0000 can be displayed when an error occurs in initial communication of the ECO-ID PCB. Field Remedy As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the connector between the ECO-ID PCB and J1315 on the Main Controller PCB (Main) was not securely fitted.
Page 920: E402 Error Code
Chapter 16 16.3.10.53 E402 Error Code 0003-8600 [ Case in the field ] Description This error code can be displayed when the feeder motor encoder pulse is not detected within 0.3 sec after the DF feeder motor drive signal has been turned ON. Cause There is a case in the field that an adjustment of the ADF transfer belt solved the problem.
Page 921: E500 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Finisher Communication. (Finisher-M1)
Chapter 16 16.3.10.56 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-M1) 0002-1671 Symptom E500 There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-M1) (Error code detail) Description T-16-21 Detail Description Timing of detection There is a fault in The communication between the machine and the data communication.
Page 922: E504 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Stack Size Detection
Chapter 16 16.3.10.58 E504 Error code detail There is a fault in stack size detection. 0002-1675 Symptom E504 There is a fault in stack size detection. (Error code detail) Description T-16-23 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The height sensor (PS1) is The communication between the height faulty.
Page 923: E512 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Delivery. (Finisher-M)
Chapter 16 16.3.10.60 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-N1) 0002-1679 Symptom E512 There is a fault in delivery.(Finisher-N1) (Error code detail) Description T-16-25 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The delivery roller, feed motor The delivery motor clock sensor fails to (M2), or feed motor clock generate the target number of clock sensor (PI10) is faulty.
Page 924: E514 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Stack Processing (Clockwise Direction)
Chapter 16 16.3.10.62 E514 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction) 0002-1692 Symptom E514 There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction). (Error code detail) Description T-16-27 Detail Description Timing of detection The stack processing motor (M2) or The stack delivery lever fails to the stack delivery lever home position reach its home position when the...
Page 925: E530 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Rear Alignment. (Finisher-M)
Chapter 16 16.3.10.64 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in rear alignment. (Finisher-M1) 0002-1698 Symptom E530 There is a fault in rear alignment.(Finisher-M1) (Error code detail) Description T-16-29 Detail Description Timing of detection The rear alignment motor (M4) The rear aligning plate fails to reach the or the rear aligning plate home home position sensor or fails to leave the...
Page 926: E531 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Stapling. (Finisher-N)
Chapter 16 16.3.10.66 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) 0002-1702 Symptom E531 There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) (Error code detail) Description T-16-31 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The stapler motor (M6) or the The stapler does not leave the stapling home position detecting stapler shift position when the...
Page 927: E535 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In The Swing Mechanism
Chapter 16 16.3.10.68 E535 Error code detail There is a fault in the swing mechanism. 0002-1706 Symptom E535 There is a fault in the swing mechanism. (Error code detail) Description T-16-33 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The swing motor (M7) or the The swing guide closed switch does not swing guide open sensor (PI18) go ON when the swing motor has been...
Page 928: E540 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In The Ascent/Descent Of The Tray
Chapter 16 16.3.10.70 E540 Error code detail There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. 0002-1711 Symptom E540 There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. (Error code detail) Description T-16-35 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The tray ascent/descent motor The ascent/descent operation does not end...
Page 929: E580 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Ascent/Descent Of The Stack Tray
Chapter 16 16.3.10.72 E580 Error code detail There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray. 0002-1716 Symptom E580 There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray. (Error code detail) Description T-16-37 Detail Description Timing of detection The stack tray ascent/descent The stack tray upper limit sensor goes motor (M5), stack tray paper...
Page 930: E5F0 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Paper Positioning For The Saddle
Chapter 16 16.3.10.74 E5F0 Error code detail There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle. 0002-1719 Symptom E5F0 There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle. (Error code detail) Description T-16-39 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The paper positioning plate The paper positioning plate home...
Page 931: E5F2 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In The Saddle Guide
Chapter 16 16.3.10.76 E5F2 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle guide. 0002-1722 Symptom E5F2 There is a fault in the saddle guide. (Error code detail) Description T-16-41 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The guide motor (M2S) or the The guide home position sensor does not guide home position sensor go ON when the guide motor has been...
Page 932: E5F4 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Stapling At The Saddle Rear
Chapter 16 16.3.10.78 E5F4 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. 0002-1752 Symptom E5F4 There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. (Error code detail) Description T-16-43 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The stapler motor (rear, M6S) The stitching home position sensor does...
Page 933: E5F6 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Stapling By The Saddle Paper Pushing Plate
Chapter 16 16.3.10.80 E5F6 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate. 0002-1756 Symptom E5F6 There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate. (Error code detail) Description T-16-45 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001...
Page 934: E5F8 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In The Saddle Connector
Chapter 16 16.3.10.81 E5F8 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle connector. 0002-1758 Symptom E5F8 There is a fault in the saddle connector. (Error code detail) Description T-16-46 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The connector of the guide The connector of the guide home position home position sensor (PI13S) sensor has been identified to have been...
Page 935: E601-0Xdd Error
Chapter 16 Detail Description Timing of detection 0002 The front cover switch The front cover switch is identified to be open for (MS2S) or the delivery 1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation or of cover switch (MS3S) is printing in the host machine with any of the faulty.
Page 936: E602-0001/E602-0002/E602-0003 Error Code: Remedy Upon Occurrence Of Error Code
Chapter 16 If the maximum density areas at 'THRU 0' are the same as those of 'THRU 1', carry out user mode > adjust/ cleaning > automatic gradation correction > full correction. *Make a test copy. If the correct density is produced, the procedure is finished. *If the correct density is not produced, go to step 5.
Page 937: E602 Error Code Detail The Hard Disk Is Faulty
Chapter 16 c-2-2. If you cannot enter service mode: c-2-2-1. While pressing the numerical keys 1 and 9 simultaneously, turn the power ON. The recovery program will automatically start and the LCD will go out. c-2-2-2. Then, the LCD comes on, turn the power OFF/ON to make sure that the machine starts up normally. c-2-2-3.
Page 938 Chapter 16 Detail Description Timing of detection 04XX The partition FSTPDEV is faulty. (For detail code, see below.) 05XX The partition DOSDEV3 is faulty. (For detail code, see below.) 06XX The partition PDLDEV is faulty. (For detail code, see below.) 07XX The partition DOSDEV4 is faulty.
Page 939: Failure Of The Distribution Board Pcb Ass'y
Chapter 16 16.3.10.86 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a failure of the Distribution Board PCB Ass'y 0002-2029 Symptom About 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, E602-0001 is displayed due to a failure of the Distribution Board PCB Ass'y.
Page 940: E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered After Performing Hd-Check
2. In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> HD-CHECK], press OK. 16.3.10.89 E602-0202 Error Code: Because of faulty SRAM Board PCB 0002-3476 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description E602-0202 is an error code occurring when a file system logical error occurs in the partition FSTDEV of the HDD.
Page 941: E602-0X02 Error Code
Chapter 16 16.3.10.92 E602-0x02 Error Code 0005-3232 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] < Field Remedy > When the power is turned ON, iRC3200 checks the control table for HDD stored in SRAM on the SRAM board. E602-0x02 can possibly be displayed during checking unassigned field in SRAM.
Page 942: E604-0000 Error Code: Because Of Faulty Expansion Ram
Chapter 16 16.3.10.96 E604-0000 Error Code: Because of faulty expansion RAM 0006-4445 [ Case in the field ] Description E604-0000 can be displayed when the capacity of the actually-mounted memory is smaller than the intended capacity. Cause In the field, this symptom occurred because the expansion RAM was faulty. Field Remedy Follow the steps below: 1.
Page 943: E606 Error Code Detail The Hard Disk Is Faulty
Chapter 16 16.3.10.98 E606 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. 0002-1783 Symptom E606 The hard disk is faulty. (Error code detail) Description T-16-51 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 A HD mounting error is detected when the HD is booted from BOOT ROM.
Page 944: E711 Error Code Detail There Is A Fault In Ipc Communication
Chapter 16 16.3.10.101 E711 Error code detail There fault communication.(DADF-K1) 0002-1787 Symptom E711 There is a fault in IPC communication.(DADF-K1)(Error code detail) Description T-16-53 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 There is a fault in data communication. An error has been detected 4 The ADF controller or the reader times or more within 1.5 sec controller PCB is faulty.
Page 945: Adf And The Reader Unit
Chapter 16 Detail Description Timing of detection 0002 There is a fault in data communication. An error has been detected 4 The finisher controller, pedestal times or more for 1.5 sec after controller, or DC controller PCB is the communication between faulty.
Page 946: Cassette Pedestal And The Printer Unit
Chapter 16 16.3.10.105 E716 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the cassette pedestal and the printer unit. 0002-1798 Symptom E716 There is a fault in the communication between the cassette pedestal and the printer unit.(Error code detail) Description T-16-57 Detail...
Page 947: E719 Error Code Detail The Coin Vendor Is Faulty
Chapter 16 T-16-58 Detail Description Timing of detection 0000 The communication with the NE controller is disrupted and is not resumed within 3 sec thereafter. 16.3.10.108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty. 0002-1801 Symptom E719 The coin vendor is faulty. (Error code detail) Description T-16-59 Detail...
Page 948: E719-0001 Error Code When The Coin Vendor Is Disconnected, Unable To Be Cleared
Chapter 16 16.3.10.110 E719-0001 Error code When the coin vendor is disconnected, unable to be cleared 0002-1991 Symptom When the coin vendor is disconnected, E719-0001 is displayed and cannot be cleared, even in the service mode. Cause A communication error occurs between the main unit and the coin vendor because the power is turned ON without resetting the value in service mode COPIER>Option>ACC>COIN from '1' to '0'.
Page 949 Chapter 16 16.3.10.113 E732-9999 Error Code: Recorded in error log after performing service mode COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON 0002-2011 [ Manual-related ] Description On a machine equipped with a reader unit, when you perform service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON], the set value will be changed from "1" to "0" in service mode [COPIER> Option> BODY> W/ SCNR].
Page 950 16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting up. Please wait" changes to error code indication 0002-2049 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause As a result of inspection, the following were found to be a main cause: - The interface cable connecting the reader unit and the printer unit is not securely fitted.
Page 951: E732-0001 Error Code A Message 'Starting Up. Please Wait' Keeps Displaying For About 2 Min. 40 Sec. After The Power Is Turned On, And Then The Error Code Results
Chapter 16 16.3.10.116 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps displaying for about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results 0002-2488 Symptom About 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, the message 'Starting up. Please wait' is displayed and then E732-001 is displayed.
Page 952: E733-0001 Error Code Printer Communication Error
Chapter 16 16.3.10.118 E733-0001 Error code Printer communication error 0002-3608 SymptomTitle E733-0001: Printer communication error Error Code SpotDisposal Since there is a possibility that the connector J112 on the DC controller PCB is not securely connected, check the connection. In the past, the flat cable connected to the main controller PCB was unintentionally disconnected at the time of installation of the Resolution Switching Board, resulting in this error code.
Page 953: E745 Error Code Detail The Tokenring Board Is Faulty
Chapter 16 16.3.10.121 E745 Error code detail The TokenRing board is faulty. 0002-1818 Symptom E745 The TokenRing board is faulty. (Error code detail) Description T-16-65 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 An attempt at initialization fails (PCI). 0002 The MAC address is faulty. 0003 The board information cannot be obtained.
Page 954: E747-00Ff Error Code Only With Printing Operation
Chapter 16 16.3.10.124 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation 0002-4682 Symptom E747-00FF: only with printing operation Error Code. Cause UFR board is faulty. Field Remedy Replace the UFR board with a new one. 16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code 0002-8535 Symptom E747-8701 Error Code Cause There is a case in the field that replacement of the interface PCB solved the symptom.
Page 955: E751-0304 Error Code
Chapter 16 16.3.10.127 E751-0304 Error Code 0003-8583 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description This error code indicates that an error has occurred during data writing to the internal memory of the drum unit. It can be displayed at FAX reception and during auto gradation adjustment. It will not disappear even after replacement of the Bk drum.
Page 956: E804-0004 Error Code Displaying If The Jack Of The Controller Fan (Fm7 Which Is Fixed On The Controller Box
Chapter 16 16.3.10.130 E804-0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan (FM7) which is fixed on the controller box 0002-2937 Symptom Don't know where to install the jack of the controller fan (FM7) that is installed onto the controller box cover. If the fan jack is not inserted, E804-000 is displayed.
Page 957: E805 Error Code Detail The Fixing Heat Discharge Fan Is Faulty
16.3.12 FAX ## Code 16.3.12.1 ##111, ##228 FAX Error Code 0003-8644 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Cause Because of a software bug, there might occurs a mismatch during the communication process between the FAX board and the main controller PCB.
Page 958: Fax Error Code
4. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#2MENU 005], set at '1' in order to activate the NL equalizer. 16.3.12.3 ##796 FAX Error Code 0003-6301 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Cause ##796 can be displayed when multiple sheets of A4R have been sent. Field Remedy This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver.9.05.
Page 959: Outline Of Electrical Components
Chapter 16 16.4 Outline of Electrical Components 16.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid 16.4.1.1 Reader Unit 0001-0290 The reader unit has no clutch or solenoid. 16.4.1.2 Printer Unit 0001-0320 T-16-70 Item Notation Name Description Clutch duplex registration clutch matches the position of images on double-sided prints.
Page 960: Motor
Chapter 16 F-16-69 16.4.2 Motor 16.4.2.1 Reader Unit 0001-0335 T-16-71 Item Notation Name Description Motor scanner motor drives the scanner system. 16.4.2.2 Printer Unit 0001-0355 T-16-72 Item Notation Name Description Motor drum ITB motor drives the drum/intermediate transfer unit. laser scanner motor (Y) drives the laser scanner (Y).
Page 961 Chapter 16 Item Notation Name Description delivery vertical path motor drives the delivery vertical path roller 2. face-down delivery motor drives the delivery vertical path roller 1. developing motor (Y) drives the developing unit (Y). developing motor (M) drives the developing unit (M). developing motor (C) drives the developing unit (C).
Page 962: Reader Unit
F-16-70 16.4.3 Fan 16.4.3.1 Reader Unit 0001-0392 The reader unit does not have fans. 16.4.3.2 Printer Unit 0001-0384 T-16-73 Item Notation Name Description FM 1 power supply cooling fan cools the power supply unit. fixing heat discharge fan discharges heat from the fixing unit. machine heat discharge fan discharges heat from inside the machine.
Page 963: Sensor
Chapter 16 Item Notation Name Description manual feed cooling fan cools paper for manual feeding. controller fan cools the inside of the controller box. F-16-71 16.4.4 Sensor 16.4.4.1 Reader Unit 0001-0393 T-16-74 Item Notation Name Description Sensor original size sensor detects original size.
Page 964: Printer Unit
Chapter 16 16.4.4.2 Printer Unit 0001-0396 T-16-75 Item Notation Name Description Sensor toner feedscrew rotation sensor detects the rotation of the feedscrew inside the toner container (Y). toner feedscrew rotation sensor detects the rotation of the feedscrew inside the toner container (M) toner feedscrew rotation sensor detects the rotation of the feedscrew inside the toner container (C)
Page 965 Chapter 16 Item Notation Name Description PS20 cassette 2 paper level sensor (A) detects the level of paper inside the cassette 2 (A) PS21 duplex registration sensor detects double-sided registration. PS22 duplex horizontal registration detects the position of paper in sub Sensor scanning direction.
Page 966: Switch
PS16 PS14 PS15 PS17 PS19 PS20 PS18 PS10 OHP2 PS26 OHP1 PS25 PS22 PS27 PS21 PS23 PS28 PS13 TPS1 PS12 PS24 PS11 F-16-72 16.4.5 Switch 16.4.5.1 Reader Unit 0001-0425 The reader unit does not have switches. 16.4.5.2 Printer Unit 0001-0430 T-16-76 Item Notation...
Page 967 Chapter 16 Item Notation Name Description cassette 2 size detecting detects the size of paper inside the switch cassette 2. MSW1 front cover open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the detection switch 1 front Cover MSW2 front cover open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the detection switch 2 front Cover MSW3...
Page 968: Lamps, Heaters, And Others
Chapter 16 16.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others 16.4.6.1 Reader Unit 0001-0436 T-16-77 Item Notation Name Description Lamp scanning lamp illuminates an original. Heater anti-condensation heater prevents condensation on a mirror. anti-condensation heater prevents condensation on a lens. 16.4.6.2 Printer Unit 0001-0437 T-16-78 Item...
Page 969: Pcbs
Chapter 16 ELCB1 PLG1 F-16-74 16.4.7 PCBs 16.4.7.1 Reader Unit 0001-0442 T-16-79 Ref. Name Description reader controller PCB controls the reader unit/ADF. interface PCB communicates image information read by the reader unit to the printer unit. inverter PCB controls the scanning lamp. CCD/AP PCB drives the CCD/processes analog images.
Page 970: Printer Unit
Chapter 16 16.4.7.2 Printer Unit 0001-0448 T-16-80 Notation Name Description DC controller PCB controls the power supply to the printer unit/ accessories Laser driver PCB (Y) controls the drive of the laser unit (Y) Laser driver PCB (M) controls the drive of the laser unit (M) Laser driver PCB (C) controls the drive of the laser unit (C) [10]...
Page 971 Chapter 16 Notation Name Description [29] HV1-SUB PCB detects charging AC current; controls developing AC output; distributes signals; assists upstream mechanisms, assists downstream mechanisms [30] HV2-SUB PCB power input [31] HV3 PCB secondary transfer [32] HV4 PCB assists upstream mechanisms (sends to HV1) [33] Relay PCB 1 reads memory information from the drum...
Page 972: Plane Pedistal
[33] [10] [39] [14] [13] [38] [12] [42] [35] [11] [43] [34] [25] [41] [26] [24] [23] [15] [16] [36] [37] [40] [18] [29] [17] [22] [31] [19] [20] [32] [27] [27] [24] [28] [31] [27] [27] [21] F-16-75 16.4.8 Plane Pedistal 16.4.8.1 Plain Pedestal-C1 0001-0488 T-16-81...
Page 973: Variable Resistors (Vr), Light-Emitting Diodes (Led), And Check Pins By Pcb
Chapter 16 F-16-76 16.4.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by 16.4.9.1 Adjusting the Variable Resistors (VR), the Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and the Check Pins by PCB 0001-0494 Of the resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the machine, those needed in servicing the machine in the field are discussed: Those VRs and check pins that are not found in the lists are designed exclusively for use at the factory, requiring special tools and measuring instruments.
Page 974: Main Controller Pcb (Main)
Chapter 16 16.4.9.2 Main Controller PCB (main) 0001-0514 LED1001 LED1002 LED1003 F-16-77 T-16-82 Notation Description LED1001 in operation LED1002 +3.3V (non-all night) being supplied LED1003 +3.3V (all-night) being supplied 16-200...
Page 975: Main Controller Pcb (Sub)
Chapter 16 16.4.9.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) 0001-0728 LED3 LED2 LED1 F-16-78 T-16-83 Notation Description LED1 +3.3V (all-nigh) being supplied LED2 +3.3V (non-all night) being supplied LED3 +5V (non-all night) being supplied 16.4.9.4 Reader Controller PCB 0001-0730 F-16-79 T-16-84 Notation Description selects paper configuration for original size detection 16-201...
Page 976: Inverter Pcb
Chapter 16 AB configuration A configuration Inch configuration F-16-80 16.4.9.5 Inverter PCB 0001-0732 VR31 F-16-81 T-16-85 Notation Description VR31 for factory 16.4.9.6 Differential PCB 0001-0734 LED1 F-16-82 T-16-86 Notation Description LED1 +3.3V (non-all night) being supplied 16-202...
Page 977 Chapter 17 Self Diagnosis...
Page 979: Error Code Details
Contents Contents 17.1 Error Code Details ............................17-1 17.1.1 Error Code Details Table ........................17-1...
Page 981: Error Code Details
Chapter 17 17.1 Error Code Details 17.1.1 Error Code Details Table 0006-4868 T-17-1 Code Detail Description Timing of detection E000 The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on is inadequate. 0001 After power-on, the output of the noncontact thermistor does not reach 40 deg C within 180 sec.
Page 982 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0004 The output of the non-contact thermistor does not reach 120 deg C within 240 sec after it has reached 90 deg C. 0005 The output of the non-contact thermistor does not reach 140 deg C within 180 sec after it has reached 120 deg C.
Page 983 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0003 A short circuit of the temperature detecting thermistor inside the non- contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec continuously. 0004 An open circuit of the infrared detecting thermistor inside the non- contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec continuously.
Page 984 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection xx20 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new ATR sensor. The drum unit is not drum unit has been fitted. It is fitted normally, or is faulty. detected in about 90 to 120 sec after idle rotation of the developing assembly.
Page 985 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection xx60 The developer concentration The fault occurs when an image is target value is faulty (set when a being formed. It is detected when new drum is fitted; the value is toner supply operation is started. extremely small).
Page 986 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection xxD0 The supply of toner for the toner The fault occurs when an image is container to the developing being formed and, in addition, when assembly has failed. The toner the T/D ratio drops while 20 prints cartridge motor fails to rotate.
Page 987 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The No. 1 mirror base moves The home position sensor does not forward but does not move from go OFF within a specific period of its home position. time. E220 A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp. 0000 The intensity of the scanning During shading adjustment at time...
Page 988 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0008 The ASIC (used for compression/ expansion processing) on the image conversion board is faulty. While encoding is under way, a time-out condition occurs (i.e., there is no response within 30 sec). 000e The data is damaged, there is a memory error on the HD.
Page 989 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection The feeder motor (M2) fails to The feeder motor encoder pulse is rotate. The feeder motor clock not detected within 0.3 sec after the sensor (SR1) is faulty. DF feeder motor drive signal has been turned ON.
Page 990 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The delivery roller, feed motor The delivery motor clock sensor (M2), or feed motor clock sensor fails to generate the target number (PI10) is faulty. of clock pulses within 10 sec at the start of operation.
Page 991 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0002 The stapler shift motor (M4) or The stapler shift base does not the stapler shift home position return from the stapler shift home sensor (PI7) is faulty. There is a position sensor when the stapler fault in the path of the stapler shift motor has been driven for 4 shift base.
Page 992 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection E577 There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction). The stack processing motor (M2) The return roller fails to reach the or the return controller home return roller home position sensor position sensor (S3) is faulty.
Page 993 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection E5F1 There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. 0001 The paper fold motor (M2S) or The number of detection pluses of the paper fold motor clock sensor the paper fold motor clock sensor (PI4S) is faulty.
Page 994 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0002 The stitch motor (front, M7S) or The stitching home position sensor the stitching home position does not go ON when the stitch sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. motor (front) has been driven in reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
Page 995 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The inlet cover switch (MS1S), The inlet cover switch is identified front cover switch (MS2S), or to be open for 1 sec or more after delivery cover switch (MS3S) is the start of initial rotation or of faulty.
Page 996 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0003 The fault is a HD write/abort error. The machine fails to read sectors of the HD. 0004 At power-on, an error is detected as part of a check made on the control table for "image storage area."...
Page 997 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection FFXX A fault exists in a partition that cannot be identified. (For detail code, see below.) Detail code of E602 Last 2 bytes of detail code (indicated by XX) Description Device error: sector, write/abort, other HDD access (driver) error File system (logic) error: error detection by check processing;...
Page 998 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 A HD mounting error is detected when the HD is booted from BOOT ROM. 0002 A reading error is detected when the HD is booted from BOOTROM. E674 The fax board is faulty. 0000 E674 Communication error with PS print server unit C1...
Page 999 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0004 There is a fault in data The communication between the communication. The cassette finisher and the machine is pedestal controller or the finisher disrupted. controller PCB is faulty. E716 There is a fault in the communication between the cassette pedestal and the printer unit. 0000 There is a fault in data An attempt at recovery fails for 2...
Page 1000 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 0011 While the mew card reader is starting up, an error occurs. (Detection is normal before the power has been turned off, but detection fails when the power is turned on.) 0012 While the new card reader is in operation, an error occurs.
Page 1001 Chapter 17 Code Detail Description Timing of detection 1000 The installed boot ROM is of a different type. E745 The TokenRing board is faulty. 0001 An attempt at initialization fails (PCI). 0002 The MAC address is faulty. 0003 The board information cannot be obtained.
Page 1002 Chapter 17 17-22...
Page 1003 Chapter 18 Service Mode...
Page 1005 Contents Contents 18.1 Outline ................................18-1 18.1.1 Service mode screen configuration ......................18-1 18.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ....................... 18-2 18.1.3 Exiting service modes ..........................18-3 18.1.4 Service mode backup ..........................18-3 18.1.5 Initial screen ............................18-4 18.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen ....................... 18-4 18.1.7 Sub-item screen ............................
Page 1006 Contents 18.5.1.1 INSTALL ............................18-82 18.5.1.2 CCD ............................... 18-82 18.5.1.3 LASER ............................18-83 18.5.1.4 CST ..............................18-83 18.5.1.5 CLEANING ........................... 18-84 18.5.1.6 FIXING ............................18-84 18.5.1.7 PANEL ............................18-85 18.5.1.8 PART-CHK ........................... 18-85 18.5.1.9 CLEAR ............................18-86 18.5.1.10 MISC-R ............................18-86 18.5.1.11 MISC-P ............................
Page 1007: Outline
Chapter 18 18.1 Outline 18.1.1 Service mode screen configuration 0000-5388 As shown below, the service modes use three screen levels: initial screen → main/intermediate item screen → sub- item screen. One set of modes are used for normal maintenance (Level 1 modes), and another set are used for troubleshooting (Level 2 modes).
Page 1008: Entering Or Selecting Service Modes
Chapter 18 The copier has the 7 service modes listed below. COPIER FEEDER DISPLAY Status display mode SORTER I/O display mode BOARD ADJUST Adjustment mode FUNCTION Operation/inspection mode OPTION Specifications setting mode TEST Test print mode COUNTER Counter mode F-18-2 18.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes 0000-5389 To execute a copier operation using a service mode, remove the cable from the external controller or the cable from...
Page 1009: Exiting Service Modes
Chapter 18 18.1.3 Exiting service modes 0000-5390 When the reset key is pressed once, the display returns to the service mode initial screen (F00-102-01). When the reset key is pressed twice, the service modes are exited, and the display returns to the user screen (standard screen).
Page 1010: Initial Screen
Chapter 18 18.1.5 Initial screen 0000-5392 COPIER Initial items FEEDER Touch an item to select it. SORTER BOARD F-18-6 18.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen 0000-5393 Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter Main items Touch an item to VERSION select it. USER ACC-STS ANALOG Intermediate items...
Page 1011: Sub-Item Screen
Chapter 18 18.1.7 Sub-item screen 0000-5394 Number of pages Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter <VERSION> < 1/3 > < READY > Selected Copier status display DC-CON intermediate READY: Ready to receive service/copy item operation. JAM: Paper jam PANEL SERVICE: Executing service mode.
Page 1012: Display (Status Display Mode)
Chapter 18 18.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) 18.2.1 COPIER 18.2.1.1 VERSION 18.2.1.1.1 COPIER 0001-2229 The following screen appears in response to selecting COPIER>DISPLAY (Level 1): Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter VERSION USER ACC-STS DENS ANALOG MISC ALARM-2 F-18-10 18.2.1.1.2 Outline 0000-5395 Displays the ROM version of each PCB (for the copier and options).
Page 1013 Chapter 18 18.2.1.1.7 FEEDER 0006-0656 ROM version of DADF controller PCB. 18.2.1.1.8 SORTER 0006-0657 ROM version of finisher controller PCB. 18.2.1.1.9 FAX 0006-0658 ROM version of fax board. 18.2.1.1.10 NIB 0006-0660 Network software version. 18.2.1.1.11 PS/PCL 0006-0661 UFR board (PS/PCL function) version. 18.2.1.1.12 LIPS 0006-0662 UFR board (LIPS function) version.
Page 1014: Acc-Sts
Chapter 18 18.2.1.1.20 LANG-FR 0006-0670 French language file version. 18.2.1.1.21 LANG-DE 0006-0671 German language file version. 18.2.1.1.22 LANG-IT 0006-0672 Italian language file version. 18.2.1.1.23 LANG-JP 0006-0673 Japanese language file version. 18.2.1.1.24 GDI-UFR 0006-0675 UFR board (GDI-UFR function) version. 18.2.1.1.25 MEAP 0006-8433 Use it to indicate the version of MEAP content.
Page 1015: Analog
Chapter 18 18.2.1.2.6 RAM 0006-0701 Displays memory capacity of memory mounted on main controller PCB. 512 MB, 768 MB 18.2.1.2.7 COINROBO 0006-0703 Displays whether coin vendor is connected. 0: Not connected, 1: Connected 18.2.1.2.8 NIB 0006-0704 Displays whether network board is connected. 0: Not connected, 1: Ethernet board connected, 2: Token ring board connected, 3: Ethernet board and token ring board connected...
Page 1016 Chapter 18 18.2.1.3.5 FIX-E 0006-0717 Fixing roller's surface temperature (sub-thermisto's detected temperature) in deg C 18.2.1.4 JAM 18.2.1.4.1 JAM 0000-5398 Displays jam data. Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter < JAM > < 1/7 > < READY > AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII...
Page 1017 Chapter 18 T-18-4 DDDD Time jam was restored T-18-5 Jam location 0: Copier 1: DADF 2: Finisher T-18-6 FFff Jam code FF: Jam type ff: Jam sensor T-18-7 Paper feed position T-18-8 HHHHHH Paper feed level software counter value T-18-9 IIIII Paper size 18-11...
Page 1018 Chapter 18 FF: Jam type T-18-10 Code Jam type 00xx Unused 01xx Delay jam 02xx Pileup jam 0Axx Jam at power ON/jam during warmup 0Bxx cover open jam (applies to all covers) 0Dxx Transparency-related jam ff: Jam sensor (printer unit) T-18-11 Code Sensor type...
Page 1019 Chapter 18 ff: Jam sensor (finisher) T-18-12 Code Finisher M1 sensor/type Finisher N1/saddle finisher N2 sensor/type 1103 Copier paper delivery delay jam 1104 Paper delivery pileup jam 1105 Jam due to early arrival while switching trays 1500 Staple jam in stapler Staple jam in stapler 1300 Jam at power ON...
Page 1020 Chapter 18 ff: Jam sensor (DADF) T-18-13 Jam name Code Sensor Condition Separation delay 0002 Separation sensor (SR3) didn't turn ON within 500 msec after separation motor (M1) switched to drive (forward). Paper feed delay 0003 U502 Registration front sensor (U502) didn't turn ON within 1 sec from separation sensor (SR3) (for small size) or near...
Page 1021 Chapter 18 Jam name Code Sensor Condition Paper delivery inlet 0041 Reverse paper delivery inlet delay sensor (SR4) didn't turn ON when conveyor motor (M2) conveyed paper for 100 mm from start of document paper feed (for small size document) or from 51 mm in front of reverse paper delivery inlet sensor (SR4) (for large...
Page 1022 Chapter 18 Jam name Code Sensor Condition Paper delivery sensor 0047 Paper delivery sensor (SR5) pileup (small size) didn't turn OFF after paper was conveyed 50 mm after document trailing edge passed paper delivery sensor (SR5). Paper delivery sensor 0048 Reverse inlet sensor (SR5) delay (large size/ didn't turn ON after specified...
Page 1023 Chapter 18 Jam name Code Sensor Condition Timing failure 2 008B During document conveying mode, when paper delivery clock sensor (SR7) was counting conveyed volume of document to deliver, paper feed of next document completed, and reverse paper delivery motor (M3) encoder pulse could no longer be detected.
Page 1024 Chapter 18 G: Paper feed position T-18-14 Code Description Except for 1 to 10 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Side paper deck 6 to 8 not used duplex unit manual feed tray 18.2.1.5 ERR 18.2.1.5.1 ERR 0000-5399 Displays error data.
Page 1025 Chapter 18 T-18-16 BBBB Date of error T-18-17 CCCC Time of error T-18-18 DDDD Time error was restored T-18-19 EEEE Error code T-18-20 FFff Detail code "0000" if none. T-18-21 Error location 0: Main controller 1: DADF 2: Finisher 3: Unused 4: Reader unit 5: Printer unit 6: PDL boards...
Page 1026: Dens
Chapter 18 18.2.1.6 DENS 18.2.1.6.1 DENS-Y/M/C/K 0005-9741 T-18-22 Calculated value of developer concentration (indicated as % off target value) Appropriate values -2.0 to 2.0% Note Value is updated when toner is supplied after main power switch ON. 18.2.1.6.2 WINDOW-Y,M,C,K 0006-0722 T-18-23 SALT sensor window dirt coefficient (Y/M/C/Bk).
Page 1027: Misc
Chapter 18 18.2.1.7 MISC 18.2.1.7.1 ENV-TR 0000-5401 T-18-25 (printer internal environment display) 1: Low humidity environment (5.8 g or less moisture) 2: Normal humidity environment (5.9 to 17.3 g moisture) 3: High humidity environment (17.4 g or more moisture) 18.2.1.7.2 Y,M,C,K-DRM-LF 0006-0738 T-18-26 Drum unit life (Y/M/C/Bk)
Page 1028: Alarm-2
Chapter 18 18.2.1.9 ALARM-2 18.2.1.9.1 ALARM2 0000-5402 Displays alarm data. Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter < 1/7 > < READY > <ALARM-2 > AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH...
Page 1029 Chapter 18 Alarm location code FFFFAlarm code Drum unit 0001: Drum life (Y) 0002: Drum life (M) 0003: Drum life (C) 0004: Drum life (K) Developer unit 0001: Toner out (Bk) 0002: Toner out (C) 0003: Toner out (M) 0004: Toner out (Y) Waste toner conveying 0001: Waste toner box full (intermediate copy belt)
Page 1030 Chapter 18 Alarm location code FFFFAlarm code UFR board 0001: Register access failed. 0002: Data transfer to memory failed (or timeout). 0003: Rendering error (ECI module) 0004: Rendering error (EM module) 0005: Rendering error (IE module) 0006: Rendering error (IDM module) 0007: Rendering error (LAM module) 0008: Rendering error (MI module) 0009: Rendering error (PCM module)
Page 1031: Envrnt
Chapter 18 Alarm location code FFFFAlarm code 0016: Figure drawing error 0017: Image drawing error 0018: LCD display error 0019: Text mode command layer error 0020: Vector mode command layer error 0021: Utility execution control error 0022: LIPS internal database management error 0023: LIPS internal menu control error 0024: LIPS internal boot error...

This manual is also suitable for:

Ir c3220n prt

Canon iR C3200 Series Service Manual

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction

Construction

Chapter 2 Installation

Table of Contents

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Construction

Chapter 4 Basic Operations (as a Printer)

Construction of the Electrical Circuitry

Chapter 5 Main Controller

Table of Contents

Chapter 6 Original Exposure System

Table of Contents

Chapter 7 Image Processing System

Analog Image Processing/Digital Image Processing

Chapter 8 Laser Exposure

Parts Replacement Procedure

Chapter 9 Image Formation

Table of Contents

Chapter 10 Pickup/Feeding System

Quick Links

Chapters

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for Canon iR C3200 Series

Summary of Contents for Canon iR C3200 Series